pkgsysconfdir = $(sysconfdir)/$(PACKAGE)
-EXTRA_DIST = OChangeLog ONEWS config.rpath pspp-mode.el
+EXTRA_DIST = OChangeLog ONEWS pspp-mode.el
CLEANFILES =
CLEAN_LOCAL =
touch m4/Makefile.am
$(GNULIB_TOOL) --import --no-changelog --m4-base=gl/m4 \
--source-base=gl --lib=libgl --tests-base=tests \
- --doc-base=gl/doc --aux-dir=. --import $(GNULIB_MODULES)
+ --doc-base=gl/doc --aux-dir=build-aux --import \
+ $(GNULIB_MODULES)
echo '*' > gl/.cvsignore
echo '*' > gl/m4/.cvsignore
libtoolize --force --automake
--- /dev/null
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+%
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2008-11-17.21}
+%
+% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
+% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
+% License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+%
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
+% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+% tex foo.texi
+% texindex foo.??
+% tex foo.texi
+% tex foo.texi
+% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+ \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptext=\t
+\let\ptextop=\top
+{\catcode`\'=\active
+\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+ \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+ \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+
+% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
+\chardef\spacecat = 10
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
+
+% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
+\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+\chardef\dashChar = `\-
+\chardef\dotChar = `\.
+\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
+\chardef\questChar = `\?
+\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
+\chardef\semiChar = `\;
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+ Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+ ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+ data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+ man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+ par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+ spell-ing spell-ings
+ stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+ wide-spread wrap-around
+}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+
+% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+%
+\def\|{%
+ % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+ \leavevmode
+ %
+ % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+ \vadjust{%
+ % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+ % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+ \vskip-\baselineskip
+ %
+ % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+ % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+ \llap{%
+ %
+ % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+ \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+ %
+ % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+ \hskip 12pt
+ }%
+ }%
+}
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+ \tracingstats2
+ \tracingpages1
+ \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
+ \tracingparagraphs1
+ \tracingoutput1
+ \tracingmacros2
+ \tracingrestores1
+ \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+ \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+ \tracingscantokens1
+ \tracingifs1
+ \tracinggroups1
+ \tracingnesting2
+ \tracingassigns1
+ \fi
+ \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
+ \errorcontextlines16
+}%
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+ \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% For @cropmarks command.
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
+% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
+% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
+%
+% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
+% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
+%
+% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
+% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
+% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
+% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
+% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
+% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
+\def\domark{%
+ \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
+ \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
+ \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
+ \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
+ \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
+ \mark{%
+ \the\toks0 \the\toks2
+ \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
+ \noexpand\else \the\toks8
+ }%
+}
+% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
+% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
+% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
+% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
+% first @chapter.
+\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
+ \ifcase0\topmark\fi
+ \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
+}
+\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
+\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
+
+% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
+\def\lastchapterdefs{}
+\def\lastsectiondefs{}
+\def\prevchapterdefs{}
+\def\prevsectiondefs{}
+\def\lastcolordefs{}
+
+% Main output routine.
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
+% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+ \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+ %
+ \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+ \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+ %
+ % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+ % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+ \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
+ \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+ \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
+ \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+ %
+ {%
+ % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+ % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+ % before the \shipout runs.
+ %
+ \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
+ \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+ % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+ % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
+ % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+ % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
+ % it needs to be
+ % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
+ \shipout\vbox{%
+ % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+ \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+ %
+ \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+ \hsize = \outerhsize
+ \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+ \vtop to0pt{%
+ \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+ }%
+ \vss}%
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin
+ \line\bgroup
+ \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+ \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \fi
+ %
+ \unvbox\headlinebox
+ \pagebody{#1}%
+ \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+ % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+ % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
+ % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+ \vskip 24pt
+ \unvbox\footlinebox
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifcropmarks
+ \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+ \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+ \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+ \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+ \vbox to0pt{\vss
+ \line{%
+ \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ \hfill
+ \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+ }%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+ }%
+ \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+ \fi
+ }% end of \shipout\vbox
+ }% end of group with \indexdummies
+ \advancepageno
+ \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+ \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+ {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+ \def\argtorun{#2}%
+ \begingroup
+ \obeylines
+ \spaceisspace
+ #1%
+ \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+}
+
+{\obeylines %
+ \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+ \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+ \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+ }%
+}
+
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+
+% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+% @end itemize @c foo
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+ \def\temp{#3}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty
+ % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
+ \let\temp\finishparsearg
+ \else
+ \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+ \fi
+ % Put the space token in:
+ \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+}
+
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
+% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+%
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
+
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+% is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+%
+% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
+
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+ \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+ \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+ \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
+ \obeyspaces
+ \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+ % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+ % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+ % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+ % should produce a line of output anyway.
+ %
+ \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+ % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+ % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+ % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+ \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
+%
+% \envdef\foo{...}
+% \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
+
+
+% At run-time, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
+
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp
+ \else
+ \badenverr
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+ not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+ \ifx#1\empty
+ out of any environment%
+ \else
+ in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+ \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+ \else
+ % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+ \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+ \csname E#1\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+
+%% Simple single-character @ commands
+
+% @@ prints an @
+% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+
+% This is turned off because it was never documented
+% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+%% but suppressing ligatures.
+%\def\`{{`}}
+%\def\'{{'}}
+
+% Used to generate quoted braces.
+\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+\let\{=\mylbrace
+\let\}=\myrbrace
+\begingroup
+ % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+ % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+ \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+ \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+ \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+ !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+ !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+ !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+ !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+!endgroup
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \c
+\let\dotaccent = \.
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \t
+\let\ubaraccent = \b
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
+ \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
+ \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+ L\kern-.36em
+ {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+ \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+ \kern-.15em
+ \TeX
+}
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+%
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+ \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+ \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
+ \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+ \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+ \fi
+ \startsavinginserts
+ %
+ \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+ % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+ % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+ % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
+ % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
+ % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+ % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+ \comment
+}
+%
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above. But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+ % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+ % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+ \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+ \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+ \egroup % End the \vtop.
+ % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+ \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+ % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+ \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+ % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+ % group, force a page break.
+ \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+ \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+ \page
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \box\groupbox
+ \prevdepth = \dimen1
+ \checkinserts
+}
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
+
+% Old definition--didn't work.
+%\parseargdef\need{\par %
+%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+%}}
+
+\parseargdef\need{%
+ % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+ % paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+ \dimen0 = #1\mil
+ \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+ \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+ \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+ %
+ % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+ % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+ % And a page break here is fine.
+ \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+ %
+ % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+ % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
+ % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+ % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+ % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
+ %
+ % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+ % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+ % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+ % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+ % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
+ % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+ % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+ \penalty9999
+ %
+ % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+ \kern -#1\mil
+ %
+ % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+ \nobreak
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+ \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+ \nobreak
+ \kern-\strutdepth
+ \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+ \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+ \vss
+ % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+ % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+ \ifx#1l%
+ \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+ \else
+ \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+ \fi
+ \null
+ }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
+ \def\righttext{#2}%
+ \else
+ \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
+ \def\righttext{#1}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifodd\pageno
+ \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+ \else
+ \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+ \fi
+ \temp
+}
+
+% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+ \pushthisfilestack
+ \def\thisfile{#1}%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
+ \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
+ \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
+ %
+ % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
+ % definitions, etc.
+ \expandafter
+ }\temp
+ \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`~=\other
+ \catcode`^=\other
+ \catcode`_=\other
+ \catcode`|=\other
+ \catcode`<=\other
+ \catcode`>=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other
+ \catcode`-=\other
+ \catcode`\`=\other
+ \catcode`\'=\other
+}
+
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+ \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+ \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
+
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+ the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+ \ifhmode
+ \let\next\centerH
+ \else
+ \let\next\centerV
+ \fi
+ \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+}
+\def\centerH#1{%
+ {%
+ \hfil\break
+ \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \line{#1}%
+ \break
+ }%
+}
+\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
+
+% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
+
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
+
+\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\commentxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+
+\let\c=\comment
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\asisword
+ \else
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \defaultparindent = 0pt
+ \else
+ \defaultparindent = #1em
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\asisword
+ \else
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+ \else
+ \lispnarrowing = #1em
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\noneword
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+ \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+ \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+ \gdef\indent{%
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ \indent
+ }%
+ \gdef\noindent{%
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ \noindent
+ }%
+ \global\everypar = {%
+ \kern -\parindent
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+ }%
+}
+
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+ \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+ \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+ \global \everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
+% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+ \catcode`\_ = \active
+ \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+ }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
+% otherwise define @\.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+ \tex
+ \mathunderscore
+ \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+ \mathactive
+ % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
+ \let\"=\ddot
+ \let\'=\acute
+ \let\==\bar
+ \let\^=\hat
+ \let\`=\grave
+ \let\u=\breve
+ \let\v=\check
+ \let\~=\tilde
+ \let\dotaccent=\dot
+ $\finishmath
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+ \catcode`^ = \active
+ \catcode`< = \active
+ \catcode`> = \active
+ \catcode`+ = \active
+ \catcode`' = \active
+ \gdef\mathactive{%
+ \let^ = \ptexhat
+ \let< = \ptexless
+ \let> = \ptexgtr
+ \let+ = \ptexplus
+ \let' = \ptexquoteright
+ }
+}
+
+% Some math mode symbols.
+\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
+\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
+\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
+% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
+% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
+% whichever is larger.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
+ \dimen0 = \wd0
+ \else
+ \dimen0 = 1.5em
+ \fi
+ \hbox to \dimen0{%
+ \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
+ .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+ .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+ .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
+ }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+ \dots
+ \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+% Texinfo's parsing.
+%
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+\def\setfilename{%
+ \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+ \iflinks
+ \tryauxfile
+ % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+ \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+ \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+ \openindices
+ \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+ %
+ % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+ % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+ \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+ \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+ \closein 1
+ %
+ \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+}
+
+% Called from \setfilename.
+%
+\def\openindices{%
+ \newindex{cp}%
+ \newcodeindex{fn}%
+ \newcodeindex{vr}%
+ \newcodeindex{tp}%
+ \newcodeindex{ky}%
+ \newcodeindex{pg}%
+}
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+\else
+ \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+ \else
+ \ifcase\pdfoutput
+ \else
+ \pdftrue
+ \fi
+ \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
+% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
+% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
+% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's what we do).
+
+% double active backslashes.
+%
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+ @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
+ @catcode`@\=@active
+ @let\=@doublebackslash}
+}
+
+% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
+% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
+% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
+% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
+% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
+%
+% #1 is the tokens to replace.
+% #2 is the replacement.
+% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
+%
+\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
+ \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
+ ##1%
+ \ifx\\##2\\%
+ \else
+ #2%
+ \HyReturnAfterFi{%
+ \HyPsdReplace##2\END
+ }%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
+}
+\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
+\def\backslashparens#1{%
+ \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
+ % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
+ \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
+ \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
+}
+
+\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
+with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
+be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
+output) for that.)}
+
+\ifpdf
+ %
+ % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
+ \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
+ \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
+ %
+ \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}}
+ % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
+ % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
+ \def\setcolor#1{%
+ \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
+ \domark
+ \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
+ }
+ %
+ \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
+ \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
+ \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
+ \def\lastcolordefs{}
+ %
+ \def\makefootline{%
+ \baselineskip24pt
+ \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
+ }
+ %
+ \def\makeheadline{%
+ \vbox to 0pt{%
+ \vskip-22.5pt
+ \line{%
+ \vbox to8.5pt{}%
+ % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
+ \getcolormarks
+ % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
+ \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
+ }%
+ \vss
+ }%
+ \nointerlineskip
+ }
+ %
+ %
+ \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
+ %
+ % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
+ \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+ \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ %
+ % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
+ % others). Let's try in that order.
+ \let\pdfimgext=\empty
+ \begingroup
+ \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+ \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+ \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+ \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+ \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+ \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+ \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
+ \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
+ \fi
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
+ \fi
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
+ \fi
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
+ \fi
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
+ \fi
+ \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+ % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+ \immediate\pdfimage
+ \else
+ \immediate\pdfximage
+ \fi
+ \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
+ \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+ #1.\pdfimgext
+ \else
+ {#1.\pdfimgext}%
+ \fi
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+ \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+ \fi}
+ %
+ \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+ % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+ % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \activebackslashdouble
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+ \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
+ }}
+ %
+ % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+ \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+ %
+ % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
+ % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
+ \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
+ \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
+ \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
+ %
+ % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+ % come from Petr Olsak
+ \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+ \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+ \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+ \advance\tempnum by 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+ %
+ % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+ % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+ % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
+ % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+ % #4 is the page number
+ %
+ \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+ % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+ % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
+ % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+ % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+ \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+ \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
+ \else
+ % Doubled backslashes in the name.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+ %
+ \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+ }
+ %
+ \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+ \begingroup
+ % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+ \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+ \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+ %
+ % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \def\thischapnum{##2}%
+ \def\thissecnum{0}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+ \def\thissecnum{##2}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+ }%
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+ }%
+ \def\thischapnum{0}%
+ \def\thissecnum{0}%
+ \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+ %
+ % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+ % al. a second time, below.
+ \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+ \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+ \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+ \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+ \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+ \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+ \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+ \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+ \readdatafile{toc}%
+ %
+ % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+ % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+ % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+ %
+ % We use the node names as the destinations.
+ \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+ \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+ \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+ %
+ % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+ % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+ % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
+ % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
+ % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+ %
+ % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+ % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
+ % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \setupdatafile
+ \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
+ \input \tocreadfilename
+ \endgroup
+ }
+ %
+ \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+ \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+ \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+ \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+ \advance\filenamelength by 1
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \nextsp}
+ \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+ \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+ \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+ \else
+ \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+ \fi
+ % make a live url in pdf output.
+ \def\pdfurl#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+ % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+ % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+ % people have actually reported a problem with.
+ %
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ \def\@{@}%
+ \let\/=\empty
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+ user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+ \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+ \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+ \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+ \def\maketoks{%
+ \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+ \ifx\first0\adn0
+ \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+ \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+ \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+ \else
+ \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+ \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+ \let\next=\maketoks
+ \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+ \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+ \fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \next}
+ \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+ {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+ \def\pdflink#1{%
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+ \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
+ \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\else
+ \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+ \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+ \let\endlink = \relax
+ \let\setcolor = \gobble
+ \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
+ \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+ \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+ \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
+}
+
+% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+%
+\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+
+% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
+% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
+\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+
+
+% Default leading.
+\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
+\def\baselinefactor{1}
+%
+\def\setleading#1{%
+ \dimen0 = #1\relax
+ \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
+ \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+ \normalbaselines
+ \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+ \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+ depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+ }%
+}
+
+% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
+%
+% do nothing with this by default.
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
+
+% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
+% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
+% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
+\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<23> <26> <0023>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+40 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+ }\endgroup
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+ }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1IT
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1IT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<25> <26> <0025>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+42 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<23> <0023>
+<24> <00A3>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+ }\endgroup
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+ }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1TT
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+ \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1TT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+5 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<21> <26> <0021>
+<28> <5F> <0028>
+<61> <7E> <0061>
+endbfrange
+32 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <2191>
+<0C> <2193>
+<0D> <0027>
+<0E> <00A1>
+<0F> <00BF>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<20> <2423>
+<27> <2019>
+<60> <2018>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+ }\endgroup
+ \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
+ \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+ }%
+\fi\fi
+
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
+% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
+% empty to omit).
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+ \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
+ \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
+}
+% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
+\let\cmap\gobble
+% emacs-page end of cmaps
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
+% Texinfo.
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1095}
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+\def\chapecsize{1728}
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\def\sececsize{1440}
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+\def\ssececsize{1200}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+\def\reducedecsize{1000}
+
+% reset the current fonts
+\textfonts
+\rm
+} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
+
+
+% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
+% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
+% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
+% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizex{%
+% Text fonts (10pt).
+\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1000}
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
+
+% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\chapbf\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\def\chapecsize{1440}
+
+% Section fonts (12pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\font\seci=cmmi12
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+\def\sececsize{1200}
+
+% Subsection fonts (10pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi10
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
+\def\ssececsize{1000}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi9
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
+\def\reducedecsize{0900}
+
+% reduce space between paragraphs
+\divide\parskip by 2
+
+% reset the current fonts
+\textfonts
+\rm
+} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
+
+
+% We provide the user-level command
+% @fonttextsize 10
+% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
+%
+\def\xword{10}
+\def\xiword{11}
+%
+\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
+ \def\textsizearg{#1}%
+ \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
+ %
+ % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
+ % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
+ %
+ \begingroup \globaldefs=1
+ \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
+ \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
+ \else
+ \errhelp=\EMsimple
+ \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
+ \fi\fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
+% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+ \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+ \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+ \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+}
+
+% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
+% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
+\def\textfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+ \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+ \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{text}%
+ \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
+\def\titlefonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+ \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+ \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+ \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+ \def\curfontsize{title}%
+ \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
+\def\chapfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+ \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+ \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+ \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+\def\secfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+ \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+ \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+ \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+\def\subsecfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+ \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+ \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+ \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+\def\reducedfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+ \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+ \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+ \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+ \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+ \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{small}%
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+\def\smallerfonts{%
+ \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+ \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+ \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+ \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+ \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+ \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+ \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
+%
+% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\definetextfontsizexi
+
+% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+
+%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+
+% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+ \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
+\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+
+% @b, explicit bold.
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+ \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+ \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+ \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+ }
+ \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+ \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+ \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+ \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+ }
+\catcode`@=\other
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
+\def\t#1{%
+ {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+ \null
+}
+\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
+\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\font\keysy=cmsy9
+\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+ \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+ \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+ \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+ \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+ \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+\def\key #1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+
+% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+\let\file=\samp
+\let\option=\samp
+
+% @code is a modification of @t,
+% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+ {%
+ % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+ \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+ %
+ % Switch to typewriter.
+ \tt
+ %
+ % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+ \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+ %
+ % Turn off hyphenation.
+ \nohyphenation
+ %
+ \rawbackslash
+ \plainfrenchspacing
+ #1%
+ }%
+ \null
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+% -- rms.
+{
+ \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
+ \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+ \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
+ %
+ \global\def\code{\begingroup
+ \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+ % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
+ \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
+ \ifallowcodebreaks
+ \let-\codedash
+ \let_\codeunder
+ \else
+ \let-\realdash
+ \let_\realunder
+ \fi
+ \codex
+ }
+}
+
+\def\realdash{-}
+\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\codeunder{%
+ % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
+ % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+ % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+ % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+ \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+ \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+ \else\normalunderscore \fi
+ \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+ {\_}%
+}
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
+% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
+% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
+%
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
+
+\def\keywordtrue{true}
+\def\keywordfalse{false}
+
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+ \def\txiarg{#1}%
+ \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+ \allowcodebreakstrue
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+ \allowcodebreaksfalse
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
+ \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+ \def\txiarg{#1}%
+ \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+ \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+ \else
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct.'
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
+
+% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+\let\indicateurl=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\command=\code
+
+% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
+\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+
+% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
+\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
+\def\click{\arrow}
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
+% a hypertex \special here.
+%
+\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \pdfurl{#1}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+ \ifpdf
+ \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+ \else
+ \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+%
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+ \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+ \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+ \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+ \endlink
+ \endgroup}
+\else
+ \let\email=\uref
+\fi
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
+
+% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
+% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
+%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
+
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+%
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+ {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+%
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+ {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+%
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+%
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+%
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+%
+% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+%
+%
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+ % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+ % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+ % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+ % font installed.
+ %
+ % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+ % that to the current nominal size.
+ %
+ % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+ % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+ %
+ \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+ %
+ \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+ % bold:
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+ \else
+ % regular:
+ \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+ \fi
+ \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't
+% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original
+% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition.
+\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
+\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
+\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
+\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
+\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
+\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
+\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
+\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
+%
+% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
+% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
+% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
+% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
+%
+% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
+% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
+% the same EC font.
+\def\ogonek#1{{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
+ \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
+ \else
+ \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+ \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
+ \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
+ \fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi
+ }%
+}
+\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
+\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
+\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
+\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
+%
+\def\ecfont{%
+ % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
+ % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
+ % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
+ % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
+ \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
+ \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+ \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+ % bold:
+ \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+ \else
+ % regular:
+ \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+ \fi
+ \thisecfont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+ $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+ \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+ }$%
+}
+
+% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
+%
+\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+%
+\ifx\Orb\undefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
+% Quotes.
+\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
+\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
+\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
+\chardef\quoteright=`\'
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+%
+\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+ \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+ % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+ % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+ \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+ % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+ %
+ % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+ % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+ \let\oldpage = \page
+ \def\page{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ \let\page = \oldpage
+ \page
+ \null
+ }%
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+ \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+ \finishtitlepage
+ \fi
+ % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+ % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+ % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+ % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+ \oldpage
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+ % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+ \HEADINGSon
+ %
+ % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+ \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \shortcontents
+ \contents
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+ \contents
+ \global\let\contents = \relax
+ \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+ \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+ \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
+ % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+ \finishedtitlepagefalse
+ \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+ \def\temp{\quotation}%
+ \ifx\thisenv\temp
+ \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+ \else
+ \checkenv\titlepage
+ \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+ {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make TeX use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+ \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+ \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what @headings on does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+ \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+ %
+ % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
+ % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+ \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
+ \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
+% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
+% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
+%
+% The same set of arguments for:
+%
+% @oddheadingmarks
+% @evenfootingmarks
+% @oddfootingmarks
+% @everyheadingmarks
+% @everyfootingmarks
+
+\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
+\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
+\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
+\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
+\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
+ \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
+\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
+ \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
+% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
+\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
+}
+
+\everyheadingmarks bottom
+\everyfootingmarks bottom
+
+% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off turns them off.
+% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{%
+\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+\HEADINGSoff
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\undefined
+\def\today{%
+ \number\day\space
+ \ifcase\month
+ \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+ \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+ \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+ \fi
+ \space\number\year}
+\fi
+
+% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+ \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+ \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
+ \itemindex{#1}%
+ \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+ %
+ % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+ % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+ % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+ % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+ % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+ \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+ %
+ % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+ % but leave it ragged-right.
+ \begingroup
+ \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+ \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+ \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+ \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+ \endgroup
+ %
+ % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+ % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+ \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
+ % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+ % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+ % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
+ % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+ % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
+ %
+ \penalty 10001
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+ \else
+ % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
+ % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+ \noindent
+ % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+ % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+ % eventually be printed.
+ \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+ \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+ \unhbox0
+ \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+ \endgroup
+ \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\envdef\table{%
+ \let\itemindex\gobble
+ \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+ \tablecheck{ftable}%
+}
+\envdef\vtable{%
+ \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+ \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+ \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+ \endgroup
+ \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+ that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+ \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \let\next\tablex
+ \fi
+ \next
+}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+ \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+ \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+ \expandafter
+ }\temp \endtablez
+}
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+ \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+ \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+ \itemmax=\tableindent
+ \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+ \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+ \exdentamount=\tableindent
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \parskip = \smallskipamount
+ \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+ \let\item = \internalBitem
+ \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
+
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \itemmax=\itemindent
+ \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+ \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+ \exdentamount=\itemindent
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \parskip=\smallskipamount
+ \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+ \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+ % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+ \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+ \let\item=\itemizeitem
+}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+ \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
+ {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+ {%
+ % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+ % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+ % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
+ % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
+ % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+ % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+ % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
+ % that's the theory.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+ \noindent
+ \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+ \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+ \flushcr
+}
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+ % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+ \def\thearg{#1}%
+ \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+ %
+ % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
+ % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+ % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+ % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+ % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+ \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+ \ifx\rest\empty
+ % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
+ % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+ % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+ % not equal to itself.
+ % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+ %
+ % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+ % continuing to look for a <number>.
+ %
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+ \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+ \else
+ % It's a letter.
+ \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+ \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+ \else
+ \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
+ \numericenumerate
+ \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \thearg
+ \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}%
+ \fi
+ \char\lccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+ \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+ \startenumeration{%
+ % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+ \ifnum\itemno=0
+ \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+ alphabet}
+ \fi
+ \char\uccode\itemno
+ }%
+}
+
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+ \advance\itemno by -1
+ \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+% @item ...
+%
+% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+% columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item ...
+% using the widest term desired in each column.
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+% @item
+% first col stuff
+% @tab
+% second col stuff
+% @tab
+% third col
+% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+% @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+% to baseline.
+% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
+ \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+ \def\firstarg{#1}%
+ \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+ \let\go = \relax
+ \else
+ \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+ \global\setpercenttrue
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent
+ \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+ \else
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+ % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+ % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+ % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+ \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+ \else
+ \let\go = \setuptable
+ \fi%
+ \fi
+ \go
+}
+
+% multitable-only commands.
+%
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
+\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \startsavinginserts
+ %
+ % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+ % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+ % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+ % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+ \def\item{\crcr}%
+ %
+ \tolerance=9500
+ \hbadness=9500
+ \setmultitablespacing
+ \parskip=\multitableparskip
+ \parindent=\multitableparindent
+ \overfullrule=0pt
+ \global\colcount=0
+ %
+ \everycr = {%
+ \noalign{%
+ \global\everytab={}%
+ \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+ % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+ \checkinserts
+ % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+ %\filbreak
+ % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+ % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
+ % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+ }%
+ }%
+ %
+ \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
+ % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+ \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+ %
+ % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+ % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+ % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+ % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+ \halign\bgroup &%
+ \global\advance\colcount by 1
+ \multistrut
+ \vtop{%
+ % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+ \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+ %
+ % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+ % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+ % the first one.
+ %
+ % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+ % to the width of each template entry.
+ %
+ % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+ % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+ % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
+ % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+ %
+ % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+ \rightskip=0pt
+ \ifnum\colcount=1
+ % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+ \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+ \else
+ \ifsetpercent \else
+ % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+ % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+ \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+ \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+ \fi
+ % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+ % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+ % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+ % For example:
+ % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+ % @item @code{#}
+ % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+ % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+ % marking characters.
+ \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+ }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+ \crcr
+ \egroup % end the \halign
+ \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+ \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+ %
+ % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+ % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
+ % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+ % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+\fi
+%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+%% table. If not, do nothing.
+%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+ %% than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
+%
+\def\makecond#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
+%
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+ % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+ \obeylines
+ \catcode`\@ = \other
+ \catcode`\{ = \other
+ \catcode`\} = \other
+ %
+ % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+ \spaceisspace
+ %
+ % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+ \doignorecount = 0
+ %
+ % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+ \dodoignore{#1}%
+}
+
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+ \obeylines %
+ %
+ \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+ % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
+ %
+ % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
+ \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
+ \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
+ %
+ % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+ % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+ % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+ \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
+ %
+ % And now expand that command.
+ \doignoretext ^^M%
+ }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
+ \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+ \else % Found a nested condition, ...
+ \advance\doignorecount by 1
+ \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
+ % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+ \fi
+ \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+ \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
+ \let\next\enddoignore
+ \else % Still inside a nested condition.
+ \advance\doignorecount by -1
+ \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
+ \fi
+ \next
+}
+
+% Finish off ignored text.
+{ \obeylines%
+ % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
+ % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
+ % would result in a blank line in the output.
+ \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+}
+
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
+%
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \def\temp{#2}%
+ \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty
+ \next{}%
+ \else
+ \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+ \fi
+ }%
+}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+ }%
+}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+{
+ \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
+ %
+ \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+ \let\value = \expandablevalue
+ % We don't want these characters active, ...
+ \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+ % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+ % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+ % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+ \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+ }
+}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+%
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+ {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+ \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+ \else
+ \csname SET#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+%
+% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \let\next=\empty
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+ #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+ \fi
+ \expandafter
+ }\next
+}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+%
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
+ \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
+%
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+ \iflinks
+ \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+ \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+}
+
+
+% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+%
+% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+%
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+ % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+ % closing the target index.
+ \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
+ % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+ % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+ \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+ \fi
+ % redefine \fooindfile:
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+ % redefine \fooindex:
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+
+% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+%
+\def\indexdummies{%
+ \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
+ \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+ \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+ %
+ % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+ % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+ % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+ \let\{ = \mylbrace
+ \let\} = \myrbrace
+ %
+ % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
+ % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
+ % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
+ % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
+ % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
+ % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
+ % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
+ % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
+ % is still getting written without apparent harm.
+ %
+ % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
+ % help-texinfo, 22may06):
+ % @macro funindex {WORD}
+ % @findex xyz
+ % @end macro
+ % ...
+ % @funindex commtest
+ %
+ % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
+ %
+ % Sample whatsit resulting:
+ % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
+ %
+ % So:
+ \let\endinput = \empty
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+}
+
+% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
+% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
+% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
+% this will be simpler.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+ \def\@{@@}%
+ \def\ {@ }%
+ \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+ \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+ %
+ % Do the redefinitions.
+ \commondummies
+ \otherbackslash
+}
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
+%
+\def\commondummies{%
+ %
+ % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
+ % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
+ % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
+ % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+ % from whatever follows.
+ %
+ % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+ % space.
+ %
+ % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+ % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+ % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+ %
+ \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
+ \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+ %
+ \commondummiesnofonts
+ %
+ \definedummyletter\_%
+ %
+ % Non-English letters.
+ \definedummyword\AA
+ \definedummyword\AE
+ \definedummyword\L
+ \definedummyword\OE
+ \definedummyword\O
+ \definedummyword\aa
+ \definedummyword\ae
+ \definedummyword\l
+ \definedummyword\oe
+ \definedummyword\o
+ \definedummyword\ss
+ \definedummyword\exclamdown
+ \definedummyword\questiondown
+ \definedummyword\ordf
+ \definedummyword\ordm
+ %
+ % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+ \definedummyword\bf
+ \definedummyword\gtr
+ \definedummyword\hat
+ \definedummyword\less
+ \definedummyword\sf
+ \definedummyword\sl
+ \definedummyword\tclose
+ \definedummyword\tt
+ %
+ \definedummyword\LaTeX
+ \definedummyword\TeX
+ %
+ % Assorted special characters.
+ \definedummyword\bullet
+ \definedummyword\comma
+ \definedummyword\copyright
+ \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
+ \definedummyword\dots
+ \definedummyword\enddots
+ \definedummyword\equiv
+ \definedummyword\error
+ \definedummyword\euro
+ \definedummyword\guillemetleft
+ \definedummyword\guillemetright
+ \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
+ \definedummyword\guilsinglright
+ \definedummyword\expansion
+ \definedummyword\minus
+ \definedummyword\ogonek
+ \definedummyword\pounds
+ \definedummyword\point
+ \definedummyword\print
+ \definedummyword\quotedblbase
+ \definedummyword\quotedblleft
+ \definedummyword\quotedblright
+ \definedummyword\quoteleft
+ \definedummyword\quoteright
+ \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
+ \definedummyword\result
+ \definedummyword\textdegree
+ %
+ % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
+ \macrolist
+ %
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ %
+ % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+ % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+ \makevalueexpandable
+}
+
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+%
+\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
+ % Control letters and accents.
+ \definedummyletter\!%
+ \definedummyaccent\"%
+ \definedummyaccent\'%
+ \definedummyletter\*%
+ \definedummyaccent\,%
+ \definedummyletter\.%
+ \definedummyletter\/%
+ \definedummyletter\:%
+ \definedummyaccent\=%
+ \definedummyletter\?%
+ \definedummyaccent\^%
+ \definedummyaccent\`%
+ \definedummyaccent\~%
+ \definedummyword\u
+ \definedummyword\v
+ \definedummyword\H
+ \definedummyword\dotaccent
+ \definedummyword\ogonek
+ \definedummyword\ringaccent
+ \definedummyword\tieaccent
+ \definedummyword\ubaraccent
+ \definedummyword\udotaccent
+ \definedummyword\dotless
+ %
+ % Texinfo font commands.
+ \definedummyword\b
+ \definedummyword\i
+ \definedummyword\r
+ \definedummyword\sc
+ \definedummyword\t
+ %
+ % Commands that take arguments.
+ \definedummyword\acronym
+ \definedummyword\cite
+ \definedummyword\code
+ \definedummyword\command
+ \definedummyword\dfn
+ \definedummyword\emph
+ \definedummyword\env
+ \definedummyword\file
+ \definedummyword\kbd
+ \definedummyword\key
+ \definedummyword\math
+ \definedummyword\option
+ \definedummyword\pxref
+ \definedummyword\ref
+ \definedummyword\samp
+ \definedummyword\strong
+ \definedummyword\tie
+ \definedummyword\uref
+ \definedummyword\url
+ \definedummyword\var
+ \definedummyword\verb
+ \definedummyword\w
+ \definedummyword\xref
+}
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+ % Accent commands should become @asis.
+ \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
+ % We can just ignore other control letters.
+ \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
+ % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+ \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+ %
+ \commondummiesnofonts
+ %
+ % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+ % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+ % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+ %\let\tt=\asis
+ %
+ \def\ { }%
+ \def\@{@}%
+ % how to handle braces?
+ \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+ %
+ % Non-English letters.
+ \def\AA{AA}%
+ \def\AE{AE}%
+ \def\L{L}%
+ \def\OE{OE}%
+ \def\O{O}%
+ \def\aa{aa}%
+ \def\ae{ae}%
+ \def\l{l}%
+ \def\oe{oe}%
+ \def\o{o}%
+ \def\ss{ss}%
+ \def\exclamdown{!}%
+ \def\questiondown{?}%
+ \def\ordf{a}%
+ \def\ordm{o}%
+ %
+ \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+ \def\TeX{TeX}%
+ %
+ % Assorted special characters.
+ % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+ \def\bullet{bullet}%
+ \def\comma{,}%
+ \def\copyright{copyright}%
+ \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+ \def\dots{...}%
+ \def\enddots{...}%
+ \def\equiv{==}%
+ \def\error{error}%
+ \def\euro{euro}%
+ \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
+ \def\guillemetright{>>}%
+ \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
+ \def\guilsinglright{>}%
+ \def\expansion{==>}%
+ \def\minus{-}%
+ \def\pounds{pounds}%
+ \def\point{.}%
+ \def\print{-|}%
+ \def\quotedblbase{"}%
+ \def\quotedblleft{"}%
+ \def\quotedblright{"}%
+ \def\quoteleft{`}%
+ \def\quoteright{'}%
+ \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
+ \def\result{=>}%
+ \def\textdegree{degrees}%
+ %
+ % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
+ % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
+ % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
+ % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
+ % that starts with \.
+ %
+ % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+ % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
+ % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+ %
+ \macrolist
+}
+
+\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
+
+% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+ \iflinks
+ {%
+ % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+ \toks0 = {#2}%
+ % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+ \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+ \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+ %
+ \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
+ % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+ \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+ \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Remember, we are within a group.
+ \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+ \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+ % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+ %
+ % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+ % get the string to sort by.
+ {\indexnofonts
+ \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+ \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+ % the original text, including any font commands. We write
+ % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+ % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+ % sorted result.
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\writeto{%
+ \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+ }%
+ \temp
+}
+
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
+% sequences like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+\newskip\whatsitskip
+\newcount\whatsitpenalty
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\safewhatsit#1{%
+\ifhmode
+ #1%
+\else
+ % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+ \whatsitskip = \lastskip
+ \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+ \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
+ %
+ % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+ % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+ % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+ % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+ % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+ \else
+ \vskip-\whatsitskip
+ \fi
+ %
+ #1%
+ %
+ \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+ % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+ % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
+ % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+ % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+ % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
+ %
+ % @deffn deffn-whatever
+ % @vindex index-whatever
+ % Description.
+ % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+ % and the "Description." paragraph.
+ \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
+ \else
+ % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+ % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+ % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+ \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
+ \fi
+\fi
+}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+% \initial {c}
+% before the first topic whose initial is c
+% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+% for a topic that is used without subtopics
+% \primary {topic}
+% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+% for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
+ \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+ %
+ \smallfonts \rm
+ \tolerance = 9500
+ \plainfrenchspacing
+ \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
+ %
+ % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+ % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+ % \initial {@}
+ % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+ % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+ \catcode`\@ = 11
+ \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+ \ifeof 1
+ % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+ % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+ % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+ % there is some text.
+ \putwordIndexNonexistent
+ \else
+ %
+ % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+ % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+ % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+ \read 1 to \temp
+ \ifeof 1
+ \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+ \else
+ % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+ % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+ % to make right now.
+ \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
+ \catcode`\\ = 0
+ \escapechar = `\\
+ \begindoublecolumns
+ \input \jobname.#1s
+ \enddoublecolumns
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+\def\initial#1{{%
+ % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+ \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+ %
+ % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+ \removelastskip
+ %
+ % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+ \penalty 0
+ \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
+ %
+ % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
+ % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+ % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+ % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+ %
+ % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+ \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+ \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+ % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+}}
+
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+% \def\entry#1#2{...
+% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+%
+% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+% --kasal, 21nov03
+\def\entry{%
+ \begingroup
+ %
+ % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+ % affect previous text.
+ \par
+ %
+ % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+ \parfillskip = 0in
+ %
+ % No extra space above this paragraph.
+ \parskip = 0in
+ %
+ % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+ \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+ %
+ % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+ % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+ % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+ % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+ % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+ %
+ % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+ % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+ \hangindent = 2em
+ %
+ % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+ % with blank space.
+ \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+ %
+ % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+ % columns.
+ \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+ %
+ % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+ \afterassignment\doentry
+ \let\temp =
+}
+\def\doentry{%
+ \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+ \noindent
+ \aftergroup\finishentry
+ % And now comes the text of the entry.
+}
+\def\finishentry#1{%
+ % #1 is the page number.
+ %
+ % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+ % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+ % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+ \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
+ \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
+ \ %
+ \else
+ %
+ % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+ % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+ % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+ \hfil\penalty50
+ \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+ %
+ % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+ % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+ % \hbox ensues.
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfgettoks#1.%
+ \ \the\toksA
+ \else
+ \ #1%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \par
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+ \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+ \parfillskip=0in
+ \parskip=0in
+ \hangindent=1in
+ \hangafter=1
+ \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+ \else
+ #2
+ \fi
+ \par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+ % Grab any single-column material above us.
+ \output = {%
+ %
+ % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+ % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+ % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+ % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
+ % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+ % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+ % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
+ \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+ \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+ % Unvbox the main output page.
+ \unvbox\PAGE
+ \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+ }%
+ }%
+ \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+ %
+ % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+ \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+ %
+ % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
+ % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+ % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
+ % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+ % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+ %
+ % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+ % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+ % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
+ % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+ % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+ %
+ % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+ % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+ % been clobbered.
+ %
+ \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+ \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ %
+ % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
+ % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+ \vsize = 2\vsize
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+ \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+ % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+ % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+ % previous page.
+ \dimen@ = \vsize
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2
+ \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
+ %
+ % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+ \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+ \onepageout\pagesofar
+ \unvbox255
+ \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+\def\pagesofar{%
+ \unvbox\partialpage
+ %
+ \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+ \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+ \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+%
+% All done with double columns.
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+ % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
+ % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
+ % following situation:
+ %
+ % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
+ % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
+ % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
+ % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
+ % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
+ % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
+ % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
+ % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
+ % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
+ % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
+ % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
+ % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
+ % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
+ % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
+ % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
+ % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
+ % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
+ % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
+ % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
+ %
+ % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
+ % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
+ \penalty0
+ %
+ \output = {%
+ % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
+ % current page, no automatic page break.
+ \balancecolumns
+ %
+ % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+ % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+ % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+ % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+ % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+ % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+ % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+ \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+ }%
+ \eject
+ \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+ %
+ % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+ % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
+ % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+ % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+ \pagegoal = \vsize
+}
+%
+% Called at the end of the double column material.
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+ \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+ \dimen@ = \ht0
+ \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+ \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+ \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+ %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+ {%
+ \vbadness = 10000
+ \loop
+ \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+ \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+ \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+ \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+ \repeat
+ }%
+ %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+ \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+ \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+ %
+ \pagesofar
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+%
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
+\def\appendixletter{%
+ \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+ \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+ % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+ % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
+ % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+ % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+ \else\char\the\appendixno
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+ \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
+% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
+% these. @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thischapternum{}
+\def\thischaptername{}
+\def\thissection{}
+\def\thissectionnum{}
+\def\thissectionname{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+ % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+ \absseclevel=#2
+ \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+ % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+ \absseclevel = 0
+ \else
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+ \absseclevel = 3
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % The heading type:
+ \def\headtype{#1}%
+ \if \headtype U%
+ \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
+ \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % Check for appendix sections:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+ \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+ \else
+ \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+ \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+ \fi\fi
+ \fi
+ % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+ \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+ \def\headtype{U}%
+ \else
+ \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ % Now print the heading:
+ \if \headtype U%
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \if \headtype A%
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \appendixzzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\absseclevel
+ \chapterzzz{#3}%
+ \or \seczzz{#3}%
+ \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+ % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+ % as an @include file.
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\chapno by 1
+ %
+ % Used for \float.
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+ %
+ % Write the actual heading.
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+ %
+ % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+ \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+ \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+ \message{\appendixnum}%
+ %
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+ %
+ \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+ \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+ \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+ %
+ % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+ \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+ \resetallfloatnos
+ %
+ % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+ % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+ % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+ % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+ % to be executed, not expanded).
+ %
+ % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+ % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+ % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+ % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
+ % the toc entries.)
+ \toks0 = {#1}%
+ \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+ %
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+ %
+ \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+ \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+ \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+ % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+ % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+ % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+ \unnmhead0{#1}%
+ \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\let\top\unnumbered
+
+% Sections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+ {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+ {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+ \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+ \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+ {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+% overlong headings to fold.
+% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
+
+\def\majorheading{%
+ {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+ \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
+
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+ {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
+ \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+ \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
+% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
+% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
+\def\chapoddpage{%
+ \chappager
+ \ifodd\pageno \else
+ \begingroup
+ \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
+ \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
+ \hbox to 0pt{}%
+ \chappager
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+
+\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+% Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+ % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+ \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+ \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+ \gdef\thissection{}}%
+ %
+ \def\temptype{#2}%
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+ \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+ \gdef\thischapter{}}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ }%
+ \else
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
+ \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+ }%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+ % the preceding space.
+ \safewhatsit\domark
+ %
+ % Insert the chapter heading break.
+ \pchapsepmacro
+ %
+ % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
+ % between here and the heading.
+ \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+ \domark
+ %
+ {%
+ \chapfonts \rmisbold
+ %
+ % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
+ % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
+ % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+ %
+ % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+ % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+ \def\toctype{omit}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{app}%
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{numchap}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
+ % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+ % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+ \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+ %
+ % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+ % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+ % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+ % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+ % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+ \donoderef{#2}%
+ %
+ % Typeset the actual heading.
+ \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+ \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+ }%
+ \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+ \nobreak
+}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerparameters{%
+ \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+ \leftskip = \rightskip
+ \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
+
+
+% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
+%
+\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+%
+\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+ \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+\par\penalty 5000 %
+}
+\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+ \parindent=0pt
+ \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+}
+\def\CHAPFopen{%
+ \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+ \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+
+
+% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
+
+
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+% section number.
+%
+\def\seckeyword{sec}
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
+ {%
+ % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+ \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
+ %
+ \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+ \def\temptype{#3}%
+ %
+ % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+ \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+ \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
+ \fi
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ % Don't redefine \thissection.
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+ \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+ \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+ \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+ % the preceding space.
+ \safewhatsit\domark
+ %
+ % Insert space above the heading.
+ \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
+ %
+ % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
+ % between here and the heading.
+ \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+ \domark
+ %
+ % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+ \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{unn}%
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+ % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+ % and don't redefine \lastsection.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+ \def\toctype{omit}%
+ \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+ \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{app}%
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+ \else
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+ \def\toctype{num}%
+ \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ %
+ % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
+ \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+ %
+ % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+ % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
+ \donoderef{#3}%
+ %
+ % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
+ % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
+ % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
+ % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
+ % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
+ % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
+ \nobreak
+ %
+ % Output the actual section heading.
+ \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+ \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
+ \unhbox0 #1}%
+ }%
+ % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+ % Don't allow stretch, though.
+ \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+ %
+ % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+ % was followed by glue.
+ \nobreak
+ %
+ % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+ % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+ % discardable item.)
+ \vskip-\parskip
+ %
+ % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
+ % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
+ % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
+ %
+ % @section sec-whatever
+ % @deffn def-whatever
+ \penalty 10001
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
+%
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
+%
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+ \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+ \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+ \iftocfileopened\else
+ \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+ \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+ \fi
+ %
+ \iflinks
+ {\atdummies
+ \edef\temp{%
+ \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+ \temp
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+ % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
+ % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+ % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+ % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+ % `1', and two named `2'.
+ \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+}
+
+
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+%
+\def\activecatcodes{%
+ \catcode`\"=\active
+ \catcode`\$=\active
+ \catcode`\<=\active
+ \catcode`\>=\active
+ \catcode`\\=\active
+ \catcode`\^=\active
+ \catcode`\_=\active
+ \catcode`\|=\active
+ \catcode`\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+\def\readtocfile{%
+ \setupdatafile
+ \activecatcodes
+ \input \tocreadfilename
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+ % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+ % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
+ % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+ % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+ \contentsalignmacro
+ \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+ %
+ % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+ % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+ \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+ %
+ \savepageno = \pageno
+ \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+ \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+ \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+ %
+ % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+ \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
+% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
+%
+\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+%
+\def\contents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+ \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readtocfile
+ \fi
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \pdfmakeoutlines
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+ \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+ %
+ \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+ \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+ % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+ \secfonts
+ \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+ \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+ \rm
+ \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+ \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+ \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+ \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+ \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readtocfile
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \vfill \eject
+ \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+ \endgroup
+ \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+ \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+ % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+ % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+ % But use \hss just in case.
+ % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+ % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+ %
+ % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+ % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
+ % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+ % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+ % there are before deciding ...
+ \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+%
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+ \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+%
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+ % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+ \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+%
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+ \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+ \begingroup
+ \chapentryfonts
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+ \endgroup
+ \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+ \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+ \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
+% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
+% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
+% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
+% currently in effect.
+\newif\ifmarkupvar
+\newif\ifmarkupsamp
+\newif\ifmarkupkey
+%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
+%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
+\newif\ifmarkupcode
+\newif\ifmarkupkbd
+%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
+%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
+\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
+\newif\ifmarkupexample
+\newif\ifmarkupverb
+\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
+
+\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
+
+\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
+ \csname markup#1true\endcsname
+ \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
+ \markupstylesetup
+}
+
+\let\markupstylesetup\empty
+
+\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
+ \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
+ \def#1%
+}
+
+% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+ \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+ \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+{
+\catcode`\'=\active
+\catcode`\`=\active
+
+\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
+\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
+
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
+
+\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
+}
+
+\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
+\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
+\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
+\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
+
+\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
+\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
+
+% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
+% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
+% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
+% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
+% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
+% regular 0x27.
+%
+\def\codequoteright{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+ '%
+ \else \char'15 \fi
+ \else \char'15 \fi
+}
+%
+% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
+% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
+% the code environments to do likewise.
+%
+\def\codequoteleft{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+ % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+ % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+ \relax`%
+ \else \char'22 \fi
+ \else \char'22 \fi
+}
+
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+ \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+ \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+ \vbox{%
+ \hrule height\dimen2
+ \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
+ \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+ \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+ \hrule height\dimen2}
+ \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+
+\envdef\tex{%
+ \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
+ \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+ \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+ \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+ \catcode `\%=14
+ \catcode `\+=\other
+ \catcode `\"=\other
+ \catcode `\|=\other
+ \catcode `\<=\other
+ \catcode `\>=\other
+ \catcode`\`=\other
+ \catcode`\'=\other
+ \escapechar=`\\
+ %
+ \let\b=\ptexb
+ \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+ \let\c=\ptexc
+ \let\,=\ptexcomma
+ \let\.=\ptexdot
+ \let\dots=\ptexdots
+ \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+ \let\!=\ptexexclam
+ \let\i=\ptexi
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+ \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+ \let\+=\tabalign
+ \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+ \let\/=\ptexslash
+ \let\*=\ptexstar
+ \let\t=\ptext
+ \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
+ \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
+ %
+ \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+ \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+ \def\@{@}%
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
+
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+ % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+ % \sectionheading, q.v.
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+ \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+ \endgraf
+ \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+ \removelastskip
+ % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+ % or better ...
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+ \vskip\envskipamount
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}}
+
+\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
+% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+ \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+ \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+ \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+ \startsavinginserts
+ \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+ \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+ \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+ \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+ \cartouter=\hsize
+ \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+ % side, and for 6pt waste from
+ % each corner char, and rule thickness
+ \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+ % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+ \carttop
+ \hbox\bgroup
+ \hskip\lskip
+ \vrule\kern3pt
+ \vbox\bgroup
+ \kern3pt
+ \hsize=\cartinner
+ \baselineskip=\normbskip
+ \lineskip=\normlskip
+ \parskip=\normpskip
+ \vskip -\parskip
+ \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+}
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+ \ifhmode\par\fi
+ \kern3pt
+ \egroup
+ \kern3pt\vrule
+ \hskip\rskip
+ \egroup
+ \cartbot
+ \egroup
+ \checkinserts
+}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+ \aboveenvbreak
+ \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+ \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+ \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+ \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+ \parskip = 0pt
+ \parindent = 0pt
+ \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+ \else
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+ \fi
+ \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+}
+
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+%
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+ % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
+ % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
+ % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
+ % to change the fonts afterward.
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+ \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+ \else
+ \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+ \smallexamplefonts \rm
+ \fi
+}
+
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it by one command:
+\def\makedispenv #1#2{
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
+ \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+ \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+}
+
+% Define two synonyms:
+\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
+ \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
+ \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+}
+
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
+%
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+%
+\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
+ \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+ \gobble % eat return
+}
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\makedispenv {display}{%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\makedispenv{format}{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \gobble
+}
+
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\envdef\flushright{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \nonfillstart
+ \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+ \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
+%
+\def\quotationstart{%
+ {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+ \parindent=0pt
+ %
+ % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+ \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+ \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+ \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+ \else
+ \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+ \fi
+ \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
+
+\envdef\quotation{%
+ \setnormaldispenv
+ \quotationstart
+}
+
+\envdef\smallquotation{%
+ \setsmalldispenv
+ \quotationstart
+}
+\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
+
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Equotation{%
+ \par
+ \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+ % indent a bit.
+ \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+ \fi
+ {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \ifx\temp\empty \else
+ {\bf #1: }%
+ \fi
+}
+
+
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+ \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+ \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+ \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+ % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
+ % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
+ % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
+ %\do\`\do\'%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+ \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+ \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+ \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
+ \tabeightspaces
+ % Respect line breaks,
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and
+ % make each space count
+ % must do in this order:
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+%
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \gdef\tabexpand{%
+ \catcode`\^^I=\active
+ \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+ \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+ \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+ \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+ \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+ \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+ }%
+ }
+\endgroup
+
+% start the verbatim environment.
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+ \let\nonarrowing = t%
+ \nonfillstart
+ % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+ \tt
+ \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+ \tabexpand
+ \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
+ % Respect line breaks,
+ % print special symbols as themselves, and
+ % make each space count
+ % must do in this order:
+ \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+ \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+ \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\ =\active
+ \obeylines %
+ % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+ % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
+ % line in the output.
+ \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+ % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+ % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+\endgroup
+%
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+ \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+ {%
+ \makevalueexpandable
+ \setupverbatim
+ \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+ \input #1
+ \afterenvbreak
+ }%
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+%
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is very desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+ \begingroup
+ \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+ \scanexp\copyingtext
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+\newcount\defunpenalty
+
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+ \medbreak
+ \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
+ % following @def command, see below.
+ \else
+ % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+ % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+ % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+ % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+ % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+ % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+ % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+ %
+ % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
+ % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
+ % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
+ % @def command.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+ %
+ % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+ % But do insert the glue.
+ \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+ \fi
+ %
+ \parindent=0in
+ \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+ % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+ \checkenv#1%
+ %
+ % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+ % It's not a great place, though.
+ \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+ %
+ % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+ \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+}
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
+
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
+%
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ % call \deffnheader:
+ #1#2 \endheader
+ % common ending:
+ \interlinepenalty = 10000
+ \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+ \endgraf
+ \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+ \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+ % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+ % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
+ \checkparencounts
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
+%
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+ \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+ \temp
+}
+
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+ \envdef#1{%
+ \startdefun
+ \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+ }%
+ \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+ \def#3%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped functions:
+
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+ % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed functions:
+
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+ \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Typed variables:
+
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+ \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+ \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+%%% Untyped variables:
+
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
+
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+
+%%% Type:
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+ \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+ \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
+%
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+%
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+ % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+ \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+ %
+ % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
+ % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+ % just below it.
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+ %
+ % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+ % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+ % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+ \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+ % The continuations:
+ \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+ % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+ \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+ %
+ % Put the type name to the right margin.
+ \noindent
+ \hbox to 0pt{%
+ \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+ % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+ \kern\leftskip
+ % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+ }%
+ %
+ % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+ \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+ \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+ {%
+ % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+ % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+ % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+ % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
+ % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+ % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+ % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+ % one has made identifiers using them :).
+ \df \tt
+ \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+ \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+ #3% output function name
+ }%
+ {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+ %
+ \boldbrax
+ % arguments will be output next, if any.
+}
+
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+ % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+ % tt for the names.
+ \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+ %
+ % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+ % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
+ \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
+ #1%
+ \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+}
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+ \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+ \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+ \catcode`\&=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+ \activeparens
+ \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+ \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+ \global\let& = \&
+
+ \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+ \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+ \ifampseen
+ % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+ % otherwise use the default font.
+ \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+ \else
+ % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+ % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+ \sf
+ \fi
+}
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+ \ifampseen
+ \ifnum\parencount=1
+ #1%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+}
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+
+\def\opnr{%
+ \global\advance\parencount by 1
+ {\parenfont(}%
+ \infirstlevel \bfafterword
+}
+\def\clnr{%
+ {\parenfont)}%
+ \infirstlevel \sl
+ \global\advance\parencount by -1
+}
+
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+ \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+ {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+ {\bf]}%
+ \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
+
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+ \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+ \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
+% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
+\def\badparencount{%
+ \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
+ \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+ \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
+ \global\brackcount=0
+}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+ \newwrite\macscribble
+ \def\scantokens#1{%
+ \toks0={#1}%
+ \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+ \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+ \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+ \input \jobname.tmp
+ }
+\fi
+
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar`\^^M
+ \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+ % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+ % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+ % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
+ % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
+ % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
+ \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+ % ... and \example
+ \spaceisspace
+ %
+ % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+ % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+ % --kasal, 29nov03
+ \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+ \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+ \temp
+}
+
+\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
+
+% List of all defined macros in the form
+% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+% if there is a need.
+\def\macrolist{}
+
+% Add the macro to \macrolist
+\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
+\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
+ \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+}
+
+% Utility routines.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+%
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\let
+ \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname#2\endcsname
+}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+
+% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
+% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
+% confine the change to the current group.
+
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+
+\def\scanctxt{%
+ \catcode`\"=\other
+ \catcode`\+=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\@=\other
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{%
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\{=\other
+ \catcode`\}=\other
+ \catcode`\^^M=\other
+ \usembodybackslash
+}
+
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+ \scanctxt
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+ \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+ \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
+ \paramno=0%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+ \fi
+ \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+ \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+ \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+ \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+ \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
+ \fi
+ \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+ \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+ \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+ \fi}
+
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+ \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+ \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+ \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+ % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+ \begingroup
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+ \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
+ \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+ \endgroup
+ \else
+ \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+ \ifx #1\relax
+ % remove this
+ \else
+ \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+
+% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
+% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+%
+% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+% the macro is used.
+
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+ \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+ \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+ \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+ \advance\paramno by 1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+ {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+ \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+ \fi\next}
+
+% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+
+\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
+{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+
+% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+\def\defmacro{%
+ \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+ \ifrecursive
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \ifcase\paramno
+ % 0
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \or % 1
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \noexpand\braceorline
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \else % many
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+ \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\xdef
+ \expandafter\expandafter
+ \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+ \paramlist{%
+ \egroup
+ \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+ \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+ \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+ \expandafter\parsearg
+ \fi \macnamexxx}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+ {%
+ \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+ \addtomacrolist{#1}%
+ \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+ }%
+ \next
+}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+ node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+ \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+ \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+ \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
+% or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+% empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
+ \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+ \iflinks
+ {%
+ \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+ \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+ \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+ ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+ }%
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
+ \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+ \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+ \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
+ }%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+ \unsepspaces
+ \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+ \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+ \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+ \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+ % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+ % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+ % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \else
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+ \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+ \else
+ % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+ \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+ \fi%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Make link in pdf output.
+ \ifpdf
+ {\indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
+ % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
+ \getfilename{#4}%
+ %
+ % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
+ {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+ \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+ %
+ \leavevmode
+ \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+ \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+ goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
+ \else
+ goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
+ \fi
+ }%
+ \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+ % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
+ % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+ {%
+ % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+ % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+ \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+ }%
+ \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+ % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+ % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+ \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+ \refx{#1-snt}{}%
+ \else
+ \printedrefname
+ \fi
+ %
+ % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+ % "in MANUALNAME".
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+ %
+ % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+ % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+ % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
+ % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+ % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+ % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+ \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+ \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+ \else
+ % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+ % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+ % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+ % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+ % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+ {\turnoffactive
+ % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+ % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+ \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+ \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+ }%
+ % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+ \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+ %
+ % But we always want a comma and a space:
+ ,\space
+ %
+ % output the `page 3'.
+ \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
+
+% Things referred to by \setref.
+%
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+ \ifnum\secno=0
+ \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+ \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+ \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+ \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+ \else
+ \putwordSection@tie
+ @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+ \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+%
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+ {%
+ \indexnofonts
+ \otherbackslash
+ \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+ \csname XR#1\endcsname
+ }%
+ \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+ % If not defined, say something at least.
+ \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+ \iflinks
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+ \else
+ \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+ \global\warnedxrefstrue
+ \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \else
+ % It's defined, so just use it.
+ \thisrefX
+ \fi
+ #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
+% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+ {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
+ % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
+ % mess up the control sequence name.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
+ }%
+ %
+ \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
+ %
+ % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+ \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
+ % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+ \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+ %
+ % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+ \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+ \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+ \else
+ % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+ \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+ % for later use in \listoffloats.
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
+ {\safexrefname}}%
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+ \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+ \ifeof 1 \else
+ \readdatafile{aux}%
+ \global\havexrefstrue
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
+ \catcode`\^^@=\other
+ \catcode`\^^A=\other
+ \catcode`\^^B=\other
+ \catcode`\^^C=\other
+ \catcode`\^^D=\other
+ \catcode`\^^E=\other
+ \catcode`\^^F=\other
+ \catcode`\^^G=\other
+ \catcode`\^^H=\other
+ \catcode`\^^K=\other
+ \catcode`\^^L=\other
+ \catcode`\^^N=\other
+ \catcode`\^^P=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+ \catcode`\^^R=\other
+ \catcode`\^^S=\other
+ \catcode`\^^T=\other
+ \catcode`\^^U=\other
+ \catcode`\^^V=\other
+ \catcode`\^^W=\other
+ \catcode`\^^X=\other
+ \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+ \catcode`\^^[=\other
+ \catcode`\^^\=\other
+ \catcode`\^^]=\other
+ \catcode`\^^^=\other
+ \catcode`\^^_=\other
+ % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+ % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+ % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
+ % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+ % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+ % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+ % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
+ % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+ %
+ % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+ % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+ % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+ %
+ \catcode`\^=\other
+ %
+ % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
+ \catcode`\~=\other
+ \catcode`\[=\other
+ \catcode`\]=\other
+ \catcode`\"=\other
+ \catcode`\_=\other
+ \catcode`\|=\other
+ \catcode`\<=\other
+ \catcode`\>=\other
+ \catcode`\$=\other
+ \catcode`\#=\other
+ \catcode`\&=\other
+ \catcode`\%=\other
+ \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+ %
+ % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+ % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
+ % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+ % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+ % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+ % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
+ % now. --karl, 15jan04.
+ \catcode`\\=\other
+ %
+ % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
+ {%
+ \count1=128
+ \def\loop{%
+ \catcode\count1=\other
+ \advance\count1 by 1
+ \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ %
+ % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
+ \catcode`\{=1
+ \catcode`\}=2
+ \catcode`\@=0
+}
+
+\def\readdatafile#1{%
+\begingroup
+ \setupdatafile
+ \input\jobname.#1
+\endgroup}
+
+
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+ \let\indent=\ptexindent
+ \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+ \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+ \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+ %
+ % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+ % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+ \let\@sf\empty
+ \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
+ %
+ % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+ \unskip
+ \thisfootno\@sf
+ \dofootnote
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+ \insert\footins\bgroup
+ % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+ % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+ % So reset some parameters.
+ \hsize=\pagewidth
+ \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+ \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+ \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+ \floatingpenalty\@MM
+ \leftskip\z@skip
+ \rightskip\z@skip
+ \spaceskip\z@skip
+ \xspaceskip\z@skip
+ \parindent\defaultparindent
+ %
+ \smallfonts \rm
+ %
+ % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+ % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
+ % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+ % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+ \let\noindent = \relax
+ %
+ % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
+ % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+ \everypar = {\hang}%
+ \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+ %
+ % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
+ % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+ % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+ \footstrut
+ \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
+
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
+%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+ \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+ \let\insert\saveinsert
+ \else
+ \let\checkinserts\relax
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
+%
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+ \afterassignment\next
+ % swallow the left brace
+ \let\temp =
+}
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+ \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+ {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+ \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
+ \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+ \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+ \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+ \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+ \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
+
+
+% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+ % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+ % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+ \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+ \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+\closein 1
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+ work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+ it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+ \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+ \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+ \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+ \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+ \global\warnednoepsftrue
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+ \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
+ \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
+ % If the image is by itself, center it.
+ \ifvmode
+ \imagevmodetrue
+ \nobreak\medskip
+ % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+ % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+ % above and below.
+ \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+ \nobreak
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
+ % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
+ % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
+ \noindent
+ %
+ % Output the image.
+ \ifpdf
+ \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+ \else
+ % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+ \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+ \let\thiscaption=\empty
+ \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+ %
+ % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+ %
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+ % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+ %
+ \startsavinginserts
+ %
+ % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+ \par
+ %
+ \vtop\bgroup
+ \def\floattype{#1}%
+ \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+ \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+ %
+ \ifx\floattype\empty
+ \let\safefloattype=\empty
+ \else
+ {%
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+ % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
+ %
+ \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+ \global\advance\floatno by 1
+ %
+ {%
+ % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
+ % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+ % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+ % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+ % lists of floats.
+ %
+ \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+ \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+ \vskip\parskip
+ %
+ % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+ \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+ \let\floatident = \empty
+ %
+ % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+ %
+ % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+ \fi
+ % the number.
+ \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+ % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+ \let\captionline = \floatident
+ %
+ \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+ \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+ \fi
+ %
+ % caption text.
+ \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+ % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+ \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+ \vskip.5\parskip
+ \captionline
+ %
+ % Space below caption.
+ \vskip\parskip
+ \fi
+ %
+ % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
+ % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+ \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+ % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+ % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
+ % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+ {%
+ \atdummies
+ %
+ % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+ % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+ % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+ \scanexp{%
+ \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+ \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+ \thiscaption
+ \else
+ \thisshortcaption
+ \fi
+ }%
+ }%
+ \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+ \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+ }%
+ \fi
+ \egroup % end of \vtop
+ %
+ % place the captured inserts
+ %
+ % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
+ % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
+ % float. --kasal, 26may04
+ %
+ \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+ \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+ %
+ % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+ \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+ \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+ \fi
+ \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
+% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+ \def\temp{#1}%
+ \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+ \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+ \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+ {%
+ % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+ % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+ \indexnofonts
+ \turnoffactive
+ \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+ }%
+ %
+ % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+ \ifhavexrefs
+ % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+ \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \begingroup
+ \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
+ \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+ \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+ \endgroup
+ \fi
+}
+
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+ % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
+ % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+ % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+ % in pdf output.
+ \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+ %
+ % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+ \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+ \writeentry
+}}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+
+% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
+% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
+% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
+%
+{
+ \catcode`\_ = \active
+ \globaldefs=1
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
+ \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
+ \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+ % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+ \ifeof 1
+ \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
+ \else
+ \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+ \input txi-#1.tex
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+ \endgroup % end raw TeX
+\endgroup}
+}
+%
+% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
+% try txi-de.tex.
+%
+\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
+ \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+ \ifeof 1
+ \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+ \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+ \else
+ \input txi-#1.tex
+ \fi
+ \closein 1
+}
+%
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
+directory should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
+% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
+% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
+%
+% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
+% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
+% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
+%
+% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
+% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
+% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
+% accented characters problem.)
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
+ % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
+ \message{no patterns for #1}%
+ \else
+ \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
+ \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
+ \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
+}
+
+% Helpers for encodings.
+% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
+%
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
+ \count255=128
+ \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+ \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
+ \advance\count255 by 1
+ \repeat
+}
+
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
+ \count255=128
+ \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+ \catcode\count255=#1\relax
+ \advance\count255 by 1
+ \repeat
+}
+
+% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
+% according to the specified encoding.
+%
+\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
+ % Encoding being declared for the document.
+ \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
+ %
+ % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
+ % to compare them with \ifx.
+ \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
+ \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
+ \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
+ \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
+ \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
+ %
+ \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
+ \asciichardefs
+ %
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+ \lattwochardefs
+ %
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+ \latonechardefs
+ %
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+ \latninechardefs
+ %
+ \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+ \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+ \utfeightchardefs
+ %
+ \else
+ \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
+ %
+ \fi % utfeight
+ \fi % latnine
+ \fi % latone
+ \fi % lattwo
+ \fi % ascii
+}
+
+% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
+% the default font encoding (OT1).
+%
+\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
+
+% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
+\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
+
+% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
+% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
+% macros containing the character definitions.
+\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+%
+% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
+\def\latonechardefs{%
+ \gdef^^a0{~}
+ \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
+ \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
+ \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
+ \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+ \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
+ \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
+ \gdef^^a7{\S}
+ \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+ \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
+ \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
+ \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
+ \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
+ \gdef^^ad{\-}
+ \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
+ \gdef^^af{\={}}
+ %
+ \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+ \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
+ \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
+ \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
+ \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+ \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
+ \gdef^^b6{\P}
+ %
+ \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
+ \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+ \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
+ \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
+ %
+ \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
+ \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
+ \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
+ \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
+ \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
+ %
+ \gdef^^c0{\`A}
+ \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+ \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+ \gdef^^c3{\~A}
+ \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+ \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
+ \gdef^^c6{\AE}
+ \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+ \gdef^^c8{\`E}
+ \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+ \gdef^^ca{\^E}
+ \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+ \gdef^^cc{\`I}
+ \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+ \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+ \gdef^^cf{\"I}
+ %
+ \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}}
+ \gdef^^d1{\~N}
+ \gdef^^d2{\`O}
+ \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+ \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+ \gdef^^d5{\~O}
+ \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+ \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+ \gdef^^d8{\O}
+ \gdef^^d9{\`U}
+ \gdef^^da{\'U}
+ \gdef^^db{\^U}
+ \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+ \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+ \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}}
+ \gdef^^df{\ss}
+ %
+ \gdef^^e0{\`a}
+ \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+ \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+ \gdef^^e3{\~a}
+ \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+ \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
+ \gdef^^e6{\ae}
+ \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+ \gdef^^e8{\`e}
+ \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+ \gdef^^ea{\^e}
+ \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+ \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
+ \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
+ \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
+ \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
+ %
+ \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}}
+ \gdef^^f1{\~n}
+ \gdef^^f2{\`o}
+ \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+ \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+ \gdef^^f5{\~o}
+ \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+ \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+ \gdef^^f8{\o}
+ \gdef^^f9{\`u}
+ \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+ \gdef^^fb{\^u}
+ \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+ \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+ \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}}
+ \gdef^^ff{\"y}
+}
+
+% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
+\def\latninechardefs{%
+ % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
+ \latonechardefs
+ %
+ \gdef^^a4{\euro}
+ \gdef^^a6{\v S}
+ \gdef^^a8{\v s}
+ \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
+ \gdef^^b8{\v z}
+ \gdef^^bc{\OE}
+ \gdef^^bd{\oe}
+ \gdef^^be{\"Y}
+}
+
+% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
+\def\lattwochardefs{%
+ \gdef^^a0{~}
+ \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
+ \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
+ \gdef^^a3{\L}
+ \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+ \gdef^^a5{\v L}
+ \gdef^^a6{\'S}
+ \gdef^^a7{\S}
+ \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+ \gdef^^a9{\v S}
+ \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
+ \gdef^^ab{\v T}
+ \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
+ \gdef^^ad{\-}
+ \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
+ \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
+ %
+ \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+ \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
+ \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
+ \gdef^^b3{\l}
+ \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+ \gdef^^b5{\v l}
+ \gdef^^b6{\'s}
+ \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
+ \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+ \gdef^^b9{\v s}
+ \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
+ \gdef^^bb{\v t}
+ \gdef^^bc{\'z}
+ \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
+ \gdef^^be{\v z}
+ \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
+ %
+ \gdef^^c0{\'R}
+ \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+ \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+ \gdef^^c3{\u A}
+ \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+ \gdef^^c5{\'L}
+ \gdef^^c6{\'C}
+ \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+ \gdef^^c8{\v C}
+ \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+ \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
+ \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+ \gdef^^cc{\v E}
+ \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+ \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+ \gdef^^cf{\v D}
+ %
+ \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
+ \gdef^^d1{\'N}
+ \gdef^^d2{\v N}
+ \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+ \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+ \gdef^^d5{\H O}
+ \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+ \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+ \gdef^^d8{\v R}
+ \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
+ \gdef^^da{\'U}
+ \gdef^^db{\H U}
+ \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+ \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+ \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
+ \gdef^^df{\ss}
+ %
+ \gdef^^e0{\'r}
+ \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+ \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+ \gdef^^e3{\u a}
+ \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+ \gdef^^e5{\'l}
+ \gdef^^e6{\'c}
+ \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+ \gdef^^e8{\v c}
+ \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+ \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
+ \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+ \gdef^^ec{\v e}
+ \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
+ \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
+ \gdef^^ef{\v d}
+ %
+ \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
+ \gdef^^f1{\'n}
+ \gdef^^f2{\v n}
+ \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+ \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+ \gdef^^f5{\H o}
+ \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+ \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+ \gdef^^f8{\v r}
+ \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
+ \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+ \gdef^^fb{\H u}
+ \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+ \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+ \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
+ \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
+}
+
+% UTF-8 character definitions.
+%
+% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
+% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
+% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
+%
+\newcount\countUTFx
+\newcount\countUTFy
+\newcount\countUTFz
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
+ \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
+ \ifx #1\relax
+ \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter #1%
+ \fi
+}
+
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\~13
+ \catcode`\"12
+
+ \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
+ \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
+ \uccode`\~\countUTFx
+ \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
+ \advance\countUTFx by 1
+ \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
+ \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
+ \fi}
+
+ \countUTFx = "C2
+ \countUTFy = "E0
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
+ \UTFviiiLoop
+
+ \countUTFx = "E0
+ \countUTFy = "F0
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
+ \UTFviiiLoop
+
+ \countUTFx = "F0
+ \countUTFy = "F4
+ \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+ \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
+ \UTFviiiLoop
+\endgroup
+
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\"=12
+ \catcode`\<=12
+ \catcode`\.=12
+ \catcode`\,=12
+ \catcode`\;=12
+ \catcode`\!=12
+ \catcode`\~=13
+
+ \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
+ \countUTFz = "#1\relax
+ \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
+ \begingroup
+ \parseXMLCharref
+ \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
+ \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
+ \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
+ \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+ \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
+ \endgroup}
+
+ \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
+ \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
+ \errhelp = \EMsimple
+ \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
+ \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
+ \parseUTFviiiA,%
+ \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
+ \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
+ \parseUTFviiiA;%
+ \parseUTFviiiA,%
+ \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
+ \else
+ \parseUTFviiiA;%
+ \parseUTFviiiA,%
+ \parseUTFviiiA!%
+ \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
+ \fi\fi\fi
+ }
+
+ \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
+ \countUTFx = \countUTFz
+ \divide\countUTFz by 64
+ \countUTFy = \countUTFz
+ \multiply\countUTFz by 64
+ \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
+ \advance\countUTFx by 128
+ \uccode `#1\countUTFx
+ \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
+
+ \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
+ \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
+ \uccode `#3\countUTFz
+ \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
+\endgroup
+
+\def\utfeightchardefs{%
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
+
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
+ \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
+}% end of \utfeightchardefs
+
+
+% US-ASCII character definitions.
+\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
+ \relax
+}
+
+% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
+% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
+% document encoding.
+%
+\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
+
+
+\message{formatting,}
+
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 2000
+
+% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+ \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+ % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+ \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+ \else
+ \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+ \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
+% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
+% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
+%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+ \voffset = #3\relax
+ \topskip = #6\relax
+ \splittopskip = \topskip
+ %
+ \vsize = #1\relax
+ \advance\vsize by \topskip
+ \outervsize = \vsize
+ \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+ \pageheight = \vsize
+ %
+ \hsize = #2\relax
+ \outerhsize = \hsize
+ \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+ \pagewidth = \hsize
+ %
+ \normaloffset = #4\relax
+ \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+ %
+ \ifpdf
+ \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+ \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+ % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
+ % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
+ \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
+ \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
+ \fi
+ %
+ \setleading{\textleading}
+ %
+ \parindent = \defaultparindent
+ \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \textleading = 13.2pt
+ %
+ % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+ \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
+ {\voffset}{.25in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+ {11in}{8.5in}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+ \textleading = 12pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+ {-.2in}{0in}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+ {9.25in}{7in}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
+% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
+\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
+ \textleading = 12pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
+ {-.2in}{-.4in}%
+ {0pt}{14pt}%
+ {9in}{6in}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = .4cm
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \textleading = 13.2pt
+ %
+ % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+ % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+ % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+ % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
+ % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
+ % your texinfo source file like this:
+ % @tex
+ % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+ % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+ % @end tex
+ \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ %
+ \tolerance = 700
+ \hfuzz = 1pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = 5mm
+}}
+
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+ \textleading = 12.5pt
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+ {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+ {210mm}{148mm}%
+ %
+ \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+ \tolerance = 800
+ \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+ \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+ \defbodyindent = 2mm
+ \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+ {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ %
+ % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+ \afourpaper
+ \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+ {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+ {297mm}{210mm}%
+ \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+ \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+ \globaldefs = 1
+ %
+ \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+ \setleading{\textleading}%
+ %
+ \dimen0 = #1\relax
+ \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+ %
+ \dimen2 = \hsize
+ \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+ %
+ \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+ {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+ {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+ {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other
+\catcode`\~=\other
+\catcode`\^=\other
+\catcode`\_=\other
+\catcode`\|=\other
+\catcode`\<=\other
+\catcode`\>=\other
+\catcode`\+=\other
+\catcode`\$=\other
+\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\def\normaltilde{~}
+\def\normalcaret{^}
+\def\normalunderscore{_}
+\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\def\normalless{<}
+\def\normalgreater{>}
+\def\normalplus{+}
+\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Turn off all special characters except @
+% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active
+\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+\chardef\hat=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active
+\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+\let\realunder=_
+% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+
+\catcode`\|=\active
+\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active
+\def<{{\tt \less}}
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active
+\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+\catcode`\+=\active
+\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active
+\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
+% parsing them.
+\def\turnoffactive{%
+ \normalturnoffactive
+ \otherbackslash
+}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
+
+% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+% in fixed width font.
+\catcode`\\=\active
+@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
+% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
+% @let \ = @normalbackslash
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.
+%
+@def@normalturnoffactive{%
+ @let\=@normalbackslash
+ @let"=@normaldoublequote
+ @let~=@normaltilde
+ @let^=@normalcaret
+ @let_=@normalunderscore
+ @let|=@normalverticalbar
+ @let<=@normalless
+ @let>=@normalgreater
+ @let+=@normalplus
+ @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+ @markupsetuplqdefault
+ @markupsetuprqdefault
+ @unsepspaces
+}
+
+% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+@otherifyactive
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+@global@let\ = @eatinput
+
+% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
+% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+%
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+ @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+ @catcode`+=@active
+ @catcode`@_=@active
+}
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+@catcode`@& = @other
+@catcode`@# = @other
+@catcode`@% = @other
+
+@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
+@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
+@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
+@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
+@catcode`@'=@active
+@catcode`@`=@active
+@markupsetuplqdefault
+@markupsetuprqdefault
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
+
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
+@ignore
+ arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
+@end ignore
dnl Initialize.
AC_PREREQ(2.63)
AC_INIT([GNU PSPP], [0.7.5], [bug-gnu-pspp@gnu.org], [pspp])
+AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([build-aux])
AC_CONFIG_HEADERS([config.h])
AC_CONFIG_TESTDIR([tests])
AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE
tests_clean:
test ! -f '$(TESTSUITE)' || $(SHELL) '$(TESTSUITE)' -C tests --clean
-AUTOM4TE = $(SHELL) $(srcdir)/missing --run autom4te
+AUTOM4TE = $(SHELL) $(srcdir)/build-aux/missing --run autom4te
AUTOTEST = $(AUTOM4TE) --language=autotest
$(TESTSUITE): package.m4 $(TESTSUITE_AT)
$(AUTOTEST) -I '$(srcdir)' -o $@.tmp $@.at
+++ /dev/null
-% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
-%
-% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
-\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
-%
-\def\texinfoversion{2008-11-17.21}
-%
-% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
-% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
-% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
-% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
-% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
-% License, or (at your option) any later version.
-%
-% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
-% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
-% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
-% General Public License for more details.
-%
-% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
-% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
-%
-% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
-% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
-% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
-%
-% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
-% reports; you can get the latest version from:
-% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
-% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
-% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
-% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
-% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
-%
-% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
-% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
-% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
-%
-% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
-% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
-% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
-% tex foo.texi
-% texindex foo.??
-% tex foo.texi
-% tex foo.texi
-% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
-% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
-% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
-% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
-%
-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
-% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
-% full Texinfo distribution.
-%
-% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
-
-
-\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
-
-% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
-% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
-% they might have appeared in the input file name.
-\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
- \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
-
-
-\chardef\other=12
-
-% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
-\let\+ = \relax
-
-% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
-\let\ptexb=\b
-\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
-\let\ptexc=\c
-\let\ptexcomma=\,
-\let\ptexdot=\.
-\let\ptexdots=\dots
-\let\ptexend=\end
-\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
-\let\ptexexclam=\!
-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
-\let\ptexgtr=>
-\let\ptexhat=^
-\let\ptexi=\i
-\let\ptexindent=\indent
-\let\ptexinsert=\insert
-\let\ptexlbrace=\{
-\let\ptexless=<
-\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
-\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
-\let\ptexplus=+
-\let\ptexrbrace=\}
-\let\ptexslash=\/
-\let\ptexstar=\*
-\let\ptext=\t
-\let\ptextop=\top
-{\catcode`\'=\active
-\global\let\ptexquoteright'}% Math-mode def from plain.tex.
-
-% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
-% starts a new line in the output.
-\newlinechar = `^^J
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
-%
-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
- \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
-\else
- \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
-\fi
-
-% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
-\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
-\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
-\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
-\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
-\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
-\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
-\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
-\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
-\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
-\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
-\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
-\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
-\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
-%
-\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
-\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
-
-% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
-\chardef\spacecat = 10
-\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
-
-% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
-\chardef\colonChar = `\:
-\chardef\commaChar = `\,
-\chardef\dashChar = `\-
-\chardef\dotChar = `\.
-\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
-\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
-\chardef\questChar = `\?
-\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
-\chardef\semiChar = `\;
-\chardef\underChar = `\_
-
-% Ignore a token.
-%
-\def\gobble#1{}
-
-% The following is used inside several \edef's.
-\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
-
-% Hyphenation fixes.
-\hyphenation{
- Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
- ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
- data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
- man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
- par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
- spell-ing spell-ings
- stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
- wide-spread wrap-around
-}
-
-% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
-\newdimen\bindingoffset
-\newdimen\normaloffset
-\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
-
-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
-%
-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
-
-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
-% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
-% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
-%
-\def\|{%
- % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
- \leavevmode
- %
- % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
- \vadjust{%
- % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
- % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
- \vskip-\baselineskip
- %
- % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
- % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
- \llap{%
- %
- % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
- \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
- %
- % This is the space between the bar and the text.
- \hskip 12pt
- }%
- }%
-}
-
-% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
-% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
-% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
-% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
-%
-\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
-\def\loggingall{%
- \tracingstats2
- \tracingpages1
- \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
- \tracingparagraphs1
- \tracingoutput1
- \tracingmacros2
- \tracingrestores1
- \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
- \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
- \tracingscantokens1
- \tracingifs1
- \tracinggroups1
- \tracingnesting2
- \tracingassigns1
- \fi
- \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
- \errorcontextlines16
-}%
-
-% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
-% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
-%
-\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
-\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
-\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
- \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
-
-% For @cropmarks command.
-% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
-%
-\newif\ifcropmarks
-\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
-%
-% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
-% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
-%
-\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
-\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
-\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
-\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
-
-% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
-% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
-% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
-%
-% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
-% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
-%
-% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
-% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
-% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
-% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
-% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
-% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
-\def\domark{%
- \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
- \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
- \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
- \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
- \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
- \mark{%
- \the\toks0 \the\toks2
- \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
- \noexpand\else \the\toks8
- }%
-}
-% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
-% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
-% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
-% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
-% first @chapter.
-\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
- \ifcase0\topmark\fi
- \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
-}
-\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
-\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
-
-% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
-\def\lastchapterdefs{}
-\def\lastsectiondefs{}
-\def\prevchapterdefs{}
-\def\prevsectiondefs{}
-\def\lastcolordefs{}
-
-% Main output routine.
-\chardef\PAGE = 255
-\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
-
-\newbox\headlinebox
-\newbox\footlinebox
-
-% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
-% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
-\def\onepageout#1{%
- \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
- %
- \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
- \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
- %
- % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
- % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
- \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
- \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
- \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
- \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
- %
- {%
- % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
- % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
- % before the \shipout runs.
- %
- \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
- \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
- % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
- % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
- % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
- % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
- % it needs to be
- % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
- \shipout\vbox{%
- % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
- \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
- %
- \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
- \hsize = \outerhsize
- \vskip-\topandbottommargin
- \vtop to0pt{%
- \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
- \nointerlineskip
- \line{%
- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
- \hfill
- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
- }%
- \vss}%
- \vskip\topandbottommargin
- \line\bgroup
- \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
- \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
- \vbox\bgroup
- \fi
- %
- \unvbox\headlinebox
- \pagebody{#1}%
- \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
- % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
- % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
- % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
- \vskip 24pt
- \unvbox\footlinebox
- \fi
- %
- \ifcropmarks
- \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
- \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
- \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
- \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
- \vbox to0pt{\vss
- \line{%
- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
- \hfill
- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
- }%
- \nointerlineskip
- \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
- }%
- \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
- \fi
- }% end of \shipout\vbox
- }% end of group with \indexdummies
- \advancepageno
- \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
-}
-
-\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
-
-\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
-{\catcode`\@ =11
-\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
-% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
-\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
- \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
-\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
-\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
-\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
-}
-
-% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
-% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
-% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
-%
-\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
-\def\nstop{\vbox
- {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
-\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
-\def\nsbot{\vbox
- {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
-
-% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
-% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
-% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
-%
-\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
-\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
- \def\argtorun{#2}%
- \begingroup
- \obeylines
- \spaceisspace
- #1%
- \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
-}
-
-{\obeylines %
- \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
- \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
- \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
- }%
-}
-
-% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
-
-% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
-%
-% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
-% @end itemize @c foo
-% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
-% by \finishparsearg.
-%
-\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
-\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
- \def\temp{#3}%
- \ifx\temp\empty
- % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
- \let\temp\finishparsearg
- \else
- \let\temp\argcheckspaces
- \fi
- % Put the space token in:
- \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
-}
-
-% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
-% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
-% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
-% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
-% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
-% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
-% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
-%
-% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
-%
-\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
-
-% \parseargdef\foo{...}
-% is roughly equivalent to
-% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
-% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
-%
-% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
-% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
-
-\def\parseargdef#1{%
- \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
-}
-\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
- \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
- \def#1##1%
-}
-
-% Several utility definitions with active space:
-{
- \obeyspaces
- \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
-
- % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
- % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
- % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
- % should produce a line of output anyway.
- %
- \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
-
- % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
- % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
- % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
- \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
-}
-
-
-\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
-
-% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
-%
-% \envdef\foo{...}
-% \def\Efoo{...}
-%
-% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
-% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
-% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
-% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
-% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
-%
-% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
-% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
-% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
-% special case.)
-
-
-% At run-time, environments start with this:
-\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
-% initialize
-\let\thisenv\empty
-
-% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
-\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
-
-% Check whether we're in the right environment:
-\def\checkenv#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\thisenv\temp
- \else
- \badenverr
- \fi
-}
-
-% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
-\def\badenverr{%
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
- not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
-}
-\def\inenvironment#1{%
- \ifx#1\empty
- out of any environment%
- \else
- in environment \expandafter\string#1%
- \fi
-}
-
-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
-% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
-%
-\parseargdef\end{%
- \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
- \else
- % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
- \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
- \csname E#1\endcsname
- \endgroup
- \fi
-}
-
-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
-
-
-%% Simple single-character @ commands
-
-% @@ prints an @
-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
-
-% This is turned off because it was never documented
-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
-%% but suppressing ligatures.
-%\def\`{{`}}
-%\def\'{{'}}
-
-% Used to generate quoted braces.
-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
-\let\{=\mylbrace
-\let\}=\myrbrace
-\begingroup
- % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
- % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
- \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
- \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
- \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
- !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
- !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
- !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
- !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
-!endgroup
-
-% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
-\let\comma = ,
-
-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
-\let\, = \c
-\let\dotaccent = \.
-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
-\let\tieaccent = \t
-\let\ubaraccent = \b
-\let\udotaccent = \d
-
-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
-\def\questiondown{?`}
-\def\exclamdown{!`}
-\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
-\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
-
-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
-\def\imacro{i}
-\def\jmacro{j}
-\def\dotless#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
- \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
- \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-
-% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
-% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
-%
-\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
-% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
-% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
-% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
-% \scriptscriptstyle).
-%
-\def\LaTeX{%
- L\kern-.36em
- {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
- \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
- \kern-.15em
- \TeX
-}
-
-% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
-% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
-% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
-% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
-% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
-{\catcode`@ = 11
- % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
- % if the definition is written into an index file.
- \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
- \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
-}
-
-% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
-\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
-
-% @* forces a line break.
-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
-
-% @/ allows a line break.
-\let\/=\allowbreak
-
-% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
-\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
-\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
-\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
-
-% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
-%
-\def\onword{on}
-\def\offword{off}
-%
-\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
- \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
- \else
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-
-% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
-% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
-% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
-\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
-
-% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
-% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
-% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
-% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
-% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
-% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
-% the text is small, which looks bad.
-%
-% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
-% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
-% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
-% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
-% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
-% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
-%
-\newbox\groupbox
-\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
-%
-\envdef\group{%
- \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
- \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
- \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
- \fi
- \startsavinginserts
- %
- \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
- % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
- % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
- % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
- % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
- % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
- % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
- \comment
-}
-%
-% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
-% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
-% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
-% above. But it's pretty close.
-\def\Egroup{%
- % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
- % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
- \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
- \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
- \egroup % End the \vtop.
- % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
- \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
- % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
- \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
- % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
- % group, force a page break.
- \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
- \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
- \page
- \fi
- \fi
- \box\groupbox
- \prevdepth = \dimen1
- \checkinserts
-}
-%
-% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
-% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
-%
-\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
-group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
-where each line of input produces a line of output.}
-
-% @need space-in-mils
-% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
-
-\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
-
-% Old definition--didn't work.
-%\parseargdef\need{\par %
-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
-%}}
-
-\parseargdef\need{%
- % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
- % paragraph.
- \par
- %
- % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
- \dimen0 = #1\mil
- \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
- \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
- \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
- %
- % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
- % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
- % And a page break here is fine.
- \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
- %
- % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
- % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
- % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
- % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
- % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
- %
- % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
- % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
- % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
- % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
- % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
- % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
- % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
- \penalty9999
- %
- % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
- \kern -#1\mil
- %
- % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
- \nobreak
- \fi
-}
-
-% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
-
-\let\br = \par
-
-% @page forces the start of a new page.
-%
-\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
-
-% @exdent text....
-% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
-
-% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
-% That's how much \exdent should take out.
-\newskip\exdentamount
-
-% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
-\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
-
-% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
-\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
- \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
-
-% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
-% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
-% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
-%
-\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
-\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
-%
-\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
- \nobreak
- \kern-\strutdepth
- \vtop to \strutdepth{%
- \baselineskip=\strutdepth
- \vss
- % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
- % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
- \ifx#1l%
- \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
- \else
- \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
- \fi
- \null
- }%
-}}
-\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
-\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
-%
-% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
-% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
-% else use TEXT for both).
-%
-\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
-\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
- \def\righttext{#2}%
- \else
- \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
- \def\righttext{#1}%
- \fi
- %
- \ifodd\pageno
- \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
- \else
- \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
- \fi
- \temp
-}
-
-% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
-%
-\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
-\def\includezzz#1{%
- \pushthisfilestack
- \def\thisfile{#1}%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
- \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
- \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
- \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
- %
- % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
- % definitions, etc.
- \expandafter
- }\temp
- \popthisfilestack
-}
-\def\filenamecatcodes{%
- \catcode`\\=\other
- \catcode`~=\other
- \catcode`^=\other
- \catcode`_=\other
- \catcode`|=\other
- \catcode`<=\other
- \catcode`>=\other
- \catcode`+=\other
- \catcode`-=\other
- \catcode`\`=\other
- \catcode`\'=\other
-}
-
-\def\pushthisfilestack{%
- \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
- \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
-}
-\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
- \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
-}
-
-\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
-\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
- the stack of filenames is empty.}}
-
-\def\thisfile{}
-
-% @center line
-% outputs that line, centered.
-%
-\parseargdef\center{%
- \ifhmode
- \let\next\centerH
- \else
- \let\next\centerV
- \fi
- \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
-}
-\def\centerH#1{%
- {%
- \hfil\break
- \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
- \line{#1}%
- \break
- }%
-}
-\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
-
-% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
-
-\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
-
-% @comment ...line which is ignored...
-% @c is the same as @comment
-% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
-
-\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
-\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
-\commentxxx}
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
-
-\let\c=\comment
-
-% @paragraphindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
-% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
-% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
-%
-\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
-\def\noneword{none}
-%
-\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\asisword
- \else
- \ifx\temp\noneword
- \defaultparindent = 0pt
- \else
- \defaultparindent = #1em
- \fi
- \fi
- \parindent = \defaultparindent
-}
-
-% @exampleindent NCHARS
-% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
-% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
-% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
-\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\asisword
- \else
- \ifx\temp\noneword
- \lispnarrowing = 0pt
- \else
- \lispnarrowing = #1em
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-
-% @firstparagraphindent WORD
-% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
-% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
-% paragraphs.
-%
-% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
-% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
-% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
-% By default, we suppress indentation.
-%
-\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\def\insertword{insert}
-%
-\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\noneword
- \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
- \else\ifx\temp\insertword
- \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
- \else
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-
-% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
-% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
-%
-% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
-% paragraph.
-%
-\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
- \gdef\indent{%
- \restorefirstparagraphindent
- \indent
- }%
- \gdef\noindent{%
- \restorefirstparagraphindent
- \noindent
- }%
- \global\everypar = {%
- \kern -\parindent
- \restorefirstparagraphindent
- }%
-}
-
-\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
- \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
- \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
- \global \everypar = {}%
-}
-
-
-% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
-%
-\def\asis#1{#1}
-
-% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
-%
-% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
-% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
-% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
-% which is what @var uses.
-{
- \catcode`\_ = \active
- \gdef\mathunderscore{%
- \catcode`\_=\active
- \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
- }
-}
-% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
-% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
-% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
-% otherwise define @\.
-%
-% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
-\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
-%
-\def\math{%
- \tex
- \mathunderscore
- \let\\ = \mathbackslash
- \mathactive
- % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
- \let\"=\ddot
- \let\'=\acute
- \let\==\bar
- \let\^=\hat
- \let\`=\grave
- \let\u=\breve
- \let\v=\check
- \let\~=\tilde
- \let\dotaccent=\dot
- $\finishmath
-}
-\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
-
-% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
-% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
-%
-{
- \catcode`^ = \active
- \catcode`< = \active
- \catcode`> = \active
- \catcode`+ = \active
- \catcode`' = \active
- \gdef\mathactive{%
- \let^ = \ptexhat
- \let< = \ptexless
- \let> = \ptexgtr
- \let+ = \ptexplus
- \let' = \ptexquoteright
- }
-}
-
-% Some math mode symbols.
-\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
-\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
-\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
-\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
-
-% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
-% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
-% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
-% whichever is larger.
-%
-\def\dots{%
- \leavevmode
- \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
- \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
- \dimen0 = \wd0
- \else
- \dimen0 = 1.5em
- \fi
- \hbox to \dimen0{%
- \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
- .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
- .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
- .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
- }%
-}
-
-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
-%
-\def\enddots{%
- \dots
- \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
-}
-
-% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
-% Texinfo's parsing.
-%
-\let\comma = ,
-
-% @refill is a no-op.
-\let\refill=\relax
-
-% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
-% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
-% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
-%
-\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
-\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
-
-% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
-% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
-% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
-\def\setfilename{%
- \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
- \iflinks
- \tryauxfile
- % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
- \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
- \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
- \openindices
- \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
- %
- % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
- % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
- \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
- \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
- \closein 1
- %
- \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
-}
-
-% Called from \setfilename.
-%
-\def\openindices{%
- \newindex{cp}%
- \newcodeindex{fn}%
- \newcodeindex{vr}%
- \newcodeindex{tp}%
- \newcodeindex{ky}%
- \newcodeindex{pg}%
-}
-
-% @bye.
-\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
-
-
-\message{pdf,}
-% adobe `portable' document format
-\newcount\tempnum
-\newcount\lnkcount
-\newtoks\filename
-\newcount\filenamelength
-\newcount\pgn
-\newtoks\toksA
-\newtoks\toksB
-\newtoks\toksC
-\newtoks\toksD
-\newbox\boxA
-\newcount\countA
-\newif\ifpdf
-\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
-
-% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
-% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
-% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
-\else
- \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
- \else
- \ifcase\pdfoutput
- \else
- \pdftrue
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-
-% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
-% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
-% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
-% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
-% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
-% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
-% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
-% that's what we do).
-
-% double active backslashes.
-%
-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
- @gdef@activebackslashdouble{%
- @catcode`@\=@active
- @let\=@doublebackslash}
-}
-
-% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
-% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
-% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
-% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
-% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
-%
-% #1 is the tokens to replace.
-% #2 is the replacement.
-% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
-%
-\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
- \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
- ##1%
- \ifx\\##2\\%
- \else
- #2%
- \HyReturnAfterFi{%
- \HyPsdReplace##2\END
- }%
- \fi
- }%
- \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
-}
-\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
-
-% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
-\def\backslashparens#1{%
- \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
- % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
- \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
- \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
-}
-
-\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
-with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
-be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
-output) for that.)}
-
-\ifpdf
- %
- % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
- \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
- \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
- %
- \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}}
- % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
- % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
- \def\setcolor#1{%
- \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
- \domark
- \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
- }
- %
- \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
- \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
- \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
- \def\lastcolordefs{}
- %
- \def\makefootline{%
- \baselineskip24pt
- \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
- }
- %
- \def\makeheadline{%
- \vbox to 0pt{%
- \vskip-22.5pt
- \line{%
- \vbox to8.5pt{}%
- % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
- \getcolormarks
- % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
- \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
- }%
- \vss
- }%
- \nointerlineskip
- }
- %
- %
- \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
- %
- % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
- \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
- \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
- %
- % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
- % others). Let's try in that order.
- \let\pdfimgext=\empty
- \begingroup
- \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
- \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
- \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
- \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
- \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
- \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
- \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
- \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
- \fi
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
- \fi
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
- \fi
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
- \fi
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
- \fi
- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
- \fi
- \closein 1
- \endgroup
- %
- % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
- % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
- \immediate\pdfimage
- \else
- \immediate\pdfximage
- \fi
- \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
- \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
- \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
- #1.\pdfimgext
- \else
- {#1.\pdfimgext}%
- \fi
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
- \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
- \fi}
- %
- \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
- % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
- % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
- \indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- \activebackslashdouble
- \makevalueexpandable
- \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
- \backslashparens\pdfdestname
- \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
- }}
- %
- % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
- \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
- %
- % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
- % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
- \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
- \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
- \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
- %
- % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
- % come from Petr Olsak
- \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
- \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
- \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
- \advance\tempnum by 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
- %
- % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
- % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
- % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
- % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
- % #4 is the page number
- %
- \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
- % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
- % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
- % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
- % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
- \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
- \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
- \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
- \else
- % Doubled backslashes in the name.
- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
- \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
- \fi
- %
- % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
- \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
- %
- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
- }
- %
- \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
- \begingroup
- % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
- \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
- \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
- %
- % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
- \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \def\thischapnum{##2}%
- \def\thissecnum{0}%
- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
- }%
- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
- \def\thissecnum{##2}%
- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
- }%
- \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
- \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
- }%
- \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
- }%
- \def\thischapnum{0}%
- \def\thissecnum{0}%
- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
- %
- % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
- % al. a second time, below.
- \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
- \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
- \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
- \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
- \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
- \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
- \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
- \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
- \readdatafile{toc}%
- %
- % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
- % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
- % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
- %
- % We use the node names as the destinations.
- \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
- \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
- \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
- \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
- %
- % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
- % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
- % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
- % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
- % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
- %
- % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
- % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
- % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
- \indexnofonts
- \setupdatafile
- \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
- \input \tocreadfilename
- \endgroup
- }
- %
- \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
- \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
- \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
- \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
- \advance\filenamelength by 1
- \fi
- \fi
- \nextsp}
- \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
- \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
- \else
- \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
- \fi
- % make a live url in pdf output.
- \def\pdfurl#1{%
- \begingroup
- % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
- % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
- % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
- % people have actually reported a problem with.
- %
- \normalturnoffactive
- \def\@{@}%
- \let\/=\empty
- \makevalueexpandable
- \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
- \endgroup}
- \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
- \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
- \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
- \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
- \def\maketoks{%
- \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
- \ifx\first0\adn0
- \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
- \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
- \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
- \else
- \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
- \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
- \let\next=\maketoks
- \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
- \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \next}
- \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
- {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
- \def\pdflink#1{%
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
- \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
- \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
-\else
- \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
- \let\pdfurl = \gobble
- \let\endlink = \relax
- \let\setcolor = \gobble
- \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
- \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
-
-
-\message{fonts,}
-
-% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
-% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
-% italics, not bold italics.
-%
-\def\setfontstyle#1{%
- \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
- \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
-}
-
-% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
-%
-\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
-
-\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
-\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
-\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
-\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
-\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
-
-% Unfortunately, we have to override this for titles and the like, since
-% in those cases "rm" is bold. Sigh.
-\def\rmisbold{\rm\def\curfontstyle{bf}}
-
-% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
-% So we set up a \sf.
-\newfam\sffam
-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
-\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
-
-% We don't need math for this font style.
-\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
-
-
-% Default leading.
-\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
-
-% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
-% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
-% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
-%
-\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
-\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
-\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
-%
-% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
-\def\baselinefactor{1}
-%
-\def\setleading#1{%
- \dimen0 = #1\relax
- \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
- \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
- \normalbaselines
- \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
- \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
- depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
- }%
-}
-
-% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
-%
-% do nothing with this by default.
-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
-
-% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
-% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
-% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
-\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-8 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<23> <26> <0023>
-<28> <3B> <0028>
-<3F> <5B> <003F>
-<5D> <5E> <005D>
-<61> <7A> <0061>
-<7B> <7C> <2013>
-endbfrange
-40 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <00660066>
-<0C> <00660069>
-<0D> <0066006C>
-<0E> <006600660069>
-<0F> <00660066006C>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<21> <0021>
-<22> <201D>
-<27> <2019>
-<3C> <00A1>
-<3D> <003D>
-<3E> <00BF>
-<5C> <201C>
-<5F> <02D9>
-<60> <2018>
-<7D> <02DD>
-<7E> <007E>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
- }\endgroup
- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
- }%
-%
-% \cmapOT1IT
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1IT)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-8 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<25> <26> <0025>
-<28> <3B> <0028>
-<3F> <5B> <003F>
-<5D> <5E> <005D>
-<61> <7A> <0061>
-<7B> <7C> <2013>
-endbfrange
-42 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <00660066>
-<0C> <00660069>
-<0D> <0066006C>
-<0E> <006600660069>
-<0F> <00660066006C>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<21> <0021>
-<22> <201D>
-<23> <0023>
-<24> <00A3>
-<27> <2019>
-<3C> <00A1>
-<3D> <003D>
-<3E> <00BF>
-<5C> <201C>
-<5F> <02D9>
-<60> <2018>
-<7D> <02DD>
-<7E> <007E>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
- }\endgroup
- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
- }%
-%
-% \cmapOT1TT
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
-%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
-%%Version: 1.000
-%%EndComments
-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
-12 dict begin
-begincmap
-/CIDSystemInfo
-<< /Registry (TeX)
-/Ordering (OT1TT)
-/Supplement 0
->> def
-/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
-/CMapType 2 def
-1 begincodespacerange
-<00> <7F>
-endcodespacerange
-5 beginbfrange
-<00> <01> <0393>
-<09> <0A> <03A8>
-<21> <26> <0021>
-<28> <5F> <0028>
-<61> <7E> <0061>
-endbfrange
-32 beginbfchar
-<02> <0398>
-<03> <039B>
-<04> <039E>
-<05> <03A0>
-<06> <03A3>
-<07> <03D2>
-<08> <03A6>
-<0B> <2191>
-<0C> <2193>
-<0D> <0027>
-<0E> <00A1>
-<0F> <00BF>
-<10> <0131>
-<11> <0237>
-<12> <0060>
-<13> <00B4>
-<14> <02C7>
-<15> <02D8>
-<16> <00AF>
-<17> <02DA>
-<18> <00B8>
-<19> <00DF>
-<1A> <00E6>
-<1B> <0153>
-<1C> <00F8>
-<1D> <00C6>
-<1E> <0152>
-<1F> <00D8>
-<20> <2423>
-<27> <2019>
-<60> <2018>
-<7F> <00A8>
-endbfchar
-endcmap
-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
-end
-end
-%%EndResource
-%%EOF
- }\endgroup
- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
- }%
-\fi\fi
-
-
-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
-% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
-% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
-% empty to omit).
-\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
- \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
-}
-% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
-\let\cmap\gobble
-% emacs-page end of cmaps
-
-% Use cm as the default font prefix.
-% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
-% before you read in texinfo.tex.
-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
-\def\fontprefix{cm}
-\fi
-% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
-\def\rmshape{r}
-\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
-\def\bfshape{b}
-\def\bxshape{bx}
-\def\ttshape{tt}
-\def\ttbshape{tt}
-\def\ttslshape{sltt}
-\def\itshape{ti}
-\def\itbshape{bxti}
-\def\slshape{sl}
-\def\slbshape{bxsl}
-\def\sfshape{ss}
-\def\sfbshape{ss}
-\def\scshape{csc}
-\def\scbshape{csc}
-
-% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
-% Texinfo.
-%
-\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
-% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
-\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
-\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\def\textecsize{1095}
-
-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
-
-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalli=cmmi9
-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
-\def\smallecsize{0900}
-
-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-\def\smallerecsize{0800}
-
-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\titleecsize{2074}
-
-% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
-\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\chapbf=\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
-\def\chapecsize{1728}
-
-% Section fonts (14.4pt).
-\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-\def\sececsize{1440}
-
-% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
-\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
-\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
-\def\ssececsize{1200}
-
-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
-\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\font\reducedi=cmmi10
-\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
-\def\reducedecsize{1000}
-
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
-\rm
-} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
-
-
-% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
-% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
-% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
-% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
-%
-\def\definetextfontsizex{%
-% Text fonts (10pt).
-\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
-\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
-\def\textecsize{1000}
-
-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
-
-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalli=cmmi9
-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
-\def\smallecsize{0900}
-
-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
-\def\smallerecsize{0800}
-
-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
-\def\titleecsize{2074}
-
-% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
-\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\let\chapbf\chaprm
-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
-\def\chapecsize{1440}
-
-% Section fonts (12pt).
-\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\secbf\secrm
-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
-\font\seci=cmmi12
-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
-\def\sececsize{1200}
-
-% Subsection fonts (10pt).
-\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
-\font\sseci=cmmi10
-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
-\def\ssececsize{1000}
-
-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
-\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
-\font\reducedi=cmmi9
-\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
-\def\reducedecsize{0900}
-
-% reduce space between paragraphs
-\divide\parskip by 2
-
-% reset the current fonts
-\textfonts
-\rm
-} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
-
-
-% We provide the user-level command
-% @fonttextsize 10
-% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
-%
-\def\xword{10}
-\def\xiword{11}
-%
-\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
- \def\textsizearg{#1}%
- \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
- %
- % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
- % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
- %
- \begingroup \globaldefs=1
- \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
- \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
- \else
- \errhelp=\EMsimple
- \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
- \fi\fi
- \endgroup
-}
-
-
-% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
-% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
-% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
-% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
-%
-\def\resetmathfonts{%
- \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
- \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
- \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
-}
-
-% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
-% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
-% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
-% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
-%
-% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
-% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
-% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
-%
-% This all needs generalizing, badly.
-%
-\def\textfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
- \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
- \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
- \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
- \def\curfontsize{text}%
- \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
-\def\titlefonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
- \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
- \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
- \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
- \def\curfontsize{title}%
- \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
-\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}}
-\def\chapfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
- \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
- \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
- \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
- \def\curfontsize{chap}%
- \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
-\def\secfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
- \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
- \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
- \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
- \def\curfontsize{sec}%
- \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
-\def\subsecfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
- \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
- \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
- \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
- \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
- \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
-\def\reducedfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
- \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
- \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
- \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
- \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
- \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
-\def\smallfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
- \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
- \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
- \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
- \def\curfontsize{small}%
- \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
-\def\smallerfonts{%
- \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
- \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
- \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
- \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
- \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
- \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
- \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
-
-% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
-
-% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
-% can fit this many characters:
-% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
-% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
-% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
-% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
-% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
-%
-% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
-% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
-%
-% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
-% --karl, 24jan03.
-
-
-% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
-%
-\definetextfontsizexi
-
-% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
-\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
-\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
-
-% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
-\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
-
-% Fonts for short table of contents.
-\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
-\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
-\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
-
-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
-
-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
- \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
-% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
-\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
-% ttsl for book titles, do we?
-\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
-
-\let\i=\smartitalic
-\let\slanted=\smartslanted
-\def\var#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\smartslanted{#1}}}
-\let\dfn=\smartslanted
-\let\emph=\smartitalic
-
-% @b, explicit bold.
-\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
-\let\strong=\b
-
-% @sansserif, explicit sans.
-\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
-
-% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
-% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
-% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
-%
-\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
-\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
-
-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
-% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
-% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
-%
-\catcode`@=11
- \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
- \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
- \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
- \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
- }
- \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
- \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
- \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
- \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
- }
-\catcode`@=\other
-\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
-
-\def\t#1{%
- {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
- \null
-}
-\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
-\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
-\font\keysy=cmsy9
-\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
- \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
- \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
- \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
- \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
- \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
-\def\key #1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-% The old definition, with no lozenge:
-%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
-
-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
-\let\file=\samp
-\let\option=\samp
-
-% @code is a modification of @t,
-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
-\def\tclose#1{%
- {%
- % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
- \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
- %
- % Switch to typewriter.
- \tt
- %
- % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
- \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
- %
- % Turn off hyphenation.
- \nohyphenation
- %
- \rawbackslash
- \plainfrenchspacing
- #1%
- }%
- \null
-}
-
-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
-% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
-% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
-
-% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
-% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
-% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
-% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
-% -- rms.
-{
- \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
- \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
- \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq % default definitions
- %
- \global\def\code{\begingroup
- \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
- % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
- \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
- \ifallowcodebreaks
- \let-\codedash
- \let_\codeunder
- \else
- \let-\realdash
- \let_\realunder
- \fi
- \codex
- }
-}
-
-\def\realdash{-}
-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
-\def\codeunder{%
- % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
- % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
- % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
- % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
- \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
- \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
- \else\normalunderscore \fi
- \discretionary{}{}{}}%
- {\_}%
-}
-\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
-
-% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
-% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
-% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
-% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
-%
-\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
-
-\def\keywordtrue{true}
-\def\keywordfalse{false}
-
-\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
- \def\txiarg{#1}%
- \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
- \allowcodebreakstrue
- \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
- \allowcodebreaksfalse
- \else
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
- \fi\fi
-}
-
-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
-% then @kbd has no effect.
-
-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
-% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
-% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
-\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
- \def\txiarg{#1}%
- \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
- \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
- \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
- \else
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
-\def\wordexample{example}
-\def\wordcode{code}
-
-% Default is `distinct.'
-\kbdinputstyle distinct
-
-\def\xkey{\key}
-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi}
-
-% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
-\let\indicateurl=\code
-\let\env=\code
-\let\command=\code
-
-% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
-\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
-
-% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
-\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
-\def\click{\arrow}
-
-% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
-% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
-% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
-% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
-% a hypertex \special here.
-%
-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \pdfurl{#1}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
- \else
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
- \ifpdf
- \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
- \else
- \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
- \fi
- \else
- \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
- \fi
- \fi
- \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
-%
-\let\url=\uref
-
-% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
-% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
-%
-%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
-\ifpdf
- \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
- \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
- \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
- \endlink
- \endgroup}
-\else
- \let\email=\uref
-\fi
-
-% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
-% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
-% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
-% this property, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
-
-% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
-% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
-%
-\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
-
-\def\kbd#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}}
-
-% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
-% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
-% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
-%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
-
-% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
-\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
-\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
-\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
-
-% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
-% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
-% all-uppercase.
-%
-\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
-\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
- {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
- \def\temp{#2}%
- \ifx\temp\empty \else
- \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
- \fi
-}
-
-% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
-% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
-%
-\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
-\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
- {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
- \def\temp{#2}%
- \ifx\temp\empty \else
- \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
- \fi
-}
-
-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
-%
-\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
-
-% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
-% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
-% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
-% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
-% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
-%
-% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
-% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
-% font height.
-%
-% feymr - regular
-% feymo - slanted
-% feybr - bold
-% feybo - bold slanted
-%
-% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
-% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
-% Hmm.
-%
-% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
-% Hope not.
-%
-%
-\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
-\def\eurofont{%
- % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
- % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
- % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
- % font installed.
- %
- % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
- % that to the current nominal size.
- %
- % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
- % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
- %
- \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
- %
- \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
- % bold:
- \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
- \else
- % regular:
- \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
- \fi
- \thiseurofont
-}
-
-% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't
-% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original
-% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition.
-\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
-\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
-\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
-\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
-\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
-\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
-\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
-\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
-%
-% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
-% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases. We put the
-% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
-% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
-%
-% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
-% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
-% the same EC font.
-\def\ogonek#1{{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
- \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
- \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
- \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
- \else
- \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
- \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
- \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi\fi
- }%
-}
-\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
-\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
-\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
-\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
-%
-\def\ecfont{%
- % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
- % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
- % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
- % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
- \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
- \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
- \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
- % bold:
- \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
- \else
- % regular:
- \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
- \fi
- \thisecfont
-}
-
-% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
-% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
-% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
-%
-\def\registeredsymbol{%
- $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
- \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
- }$%
-}
-
-% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
-%
-\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
-
-% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
-% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
-% so we'll define it if necessary.
-%
-\ifx\Orb\undefined
-\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
-\fi
-
-% Quotes.
-\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
-\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
-\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
-\chardef\quoteright=`\'
-
-
-\message{page headings,}
-
-\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
-\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
-
-% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
-\newif\ifseenauthor
-\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
-
-% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
-% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
-%
-\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
-
-\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
- \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
-
-\envdef\titlepage{%
- % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
- \begingroup
- \parindent=0pt \textfonts
- % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
- \vglue\titlepagetopglue
- % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
- %
- % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
- % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
- \let\oldpage = \page
- \def\page{%
- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
- \fi
- \let\page = \oldpage
- \page
- \null
- }%
-}
-
-\def\Etitlepage{%
- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
- \finishtitlepage
- \fi
- % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
- % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
- % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
- % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
- \oldpage
- \endgroup
- %
- % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
- % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
- \HEADINGSon
- %
- % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
- \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
- \shortcontents
- \contents
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \fi
- %
- \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
- \contents
- \global\let\contents = \relax
- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\finishtitlepage{%
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
- \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
- \finishedtitlepagetrue
-}
-
-%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
-
-\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
-\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
-
-\parseargdef\title{%
- \checkenv\titlepage
- \leftline{\titlefonts\rmisbold #1}
- % print a rule at the page bottom also.
- \finishedtitlepagefalse
- \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
-}
-
-\parseargdef\subtitle{%
- \checkenv\titlepage
- {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
-}
-
-% @author should come last, but may come many times.
-% It can also be used inside @quotation.
-%
-\parseargdef\author{%
- \def\temp{\quotation}%
- \ifx\thisenv\temp
- \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
- \else
- \checkenv\titlepage
- \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
- {\secfonts\rmisbold \leftline{#1}}%
- \fi
-}
-
-
-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
-
-\let\thispage=\folio
-
-\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
-\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
-\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
-
-% Now make TeX use those variables
-\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
- \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
-\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
- \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
-\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
-
-% Commands to set those variables.
-% For example, this is what @headings on does
-% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
-% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
-% @evenfooting @thisfile||
-% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
-
-
-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
-\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
-\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
-
-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
-\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
-\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
-
-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
-\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
-\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
- \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
- %
- % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
- % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
- \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
- \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
-}
-
-\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
-
-% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
-% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
-%
-% The same set of arguments for:
-%
-% @oddheadingmarks
-% @evenfootingmarks
-% @oddfootingmarks
-% @everyheadingmarks
-% @everyfootingmarks
-
-\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
-\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
-\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
-\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
-\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
- \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
-\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
- \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
-% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
-\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
- \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
-}
-
-\everyheadingmarks bottom
-\everyfootingmarks bottom
-
-% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
-% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
-% @headings off turns them off.
-% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
-% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
-% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
-% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
-% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
-
-\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\HEADINGSoff{%
-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
-\HEADINGSoff
-% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
-% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
-% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
-% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
-% edge of all pages.
-\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-
-% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
-% page number on top right.
-\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
-\global\pageno=1
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
-
-\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
-\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
-\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-}
-
-\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
-\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-}
-
-% Subroutines used in generating headings
-% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
-% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
-% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
-\ifx\today\undefined
-\def\today{%
- \number\day\space
- \ifcase\month
- \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
- \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
- \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
- \fi
- \space\number\year}
-\fi
-
-% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
-% It generates no output of its own.
-\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
-\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
-
-
-\message{tables,}
-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
-
-% default indentation of table text
-\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
-% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
-\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
-% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
-\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
-
-% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
-\newdimen\itemmax
-
-% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
-% these defs.
-% They also define \itemindex
-% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
-
-\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
-
-\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
-
-\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
-\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
-
-\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
- \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
- \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
- \itemindex{#1}%
- \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
- %
- % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
- % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
- % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
- % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
- % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
- \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
- %
- % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
- % but leave it ragged-right.
- \begingroup
- \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
- \advance\hsize by\tableindent
- \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
- \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
- \endgroup
- %
- % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
- % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
- \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
- %
- % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
- % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
- % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
- % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
- % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
- % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
- %
- \penalty 10001
- \endgroup
- \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
- \else
- % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
- % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
- \noindent
- % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
- % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
- % eventually be printed.
- \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
- \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
- \unhbox0
- \nobreak\kern\dimen0
- \endgroup
- \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
-
-% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
-\envdef\table{%
- \let\itemindex\gobble
- \tablecheck{table}%
-}
-\envdef\ftable{%
- \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
- \tablecheck{ftable}%
-}
-\envdef\vtable{%
- \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
- \tablecheck{vtable}%
-}
-\def\tablecheck#1{%
- \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
- \endgroup
- \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
- that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
- \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
- \else
- \let\next\tablex
- \fi
- \next
-}
-\def\tablex#1{%
- \def\itemindicate{#1}%
- \parsearg\tabley
-}
-\def\tabley#1{%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable
- \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
- \expandafter
- }\temp \endtablez
-}
-\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
- \aboveenvbreak
- \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
- \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
- \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
- \itemmax=\tableindent
- \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
- \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
- \exdentamount=\tableindent
- \parindent = 0pt
- \parskip = \smallskipamount
- \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
- \let\item = \internalBitem
- \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
-}
-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
-\let\Eftable\Etable
-\let\Evtable\Etable
-\let\Eitemize\Etable
-\let\Eenumerate\Etable
-
-% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
-
-\newcount \itemno
-
-\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
-
-\def\doitemize#1{%
- \aboveenvbreak
- \itemmax=\itemindent
- \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
- \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
- \exdentamount=\itemindent
- \parindent=0pt
- \parskip=\smallskipamount
- \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
- \def\itemcontents{#1}%
- % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
- \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
- \let\item=\itemizeitem
-}
-
-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
-%
-\def\itemizeitem{%
- \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
- {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
- {%
- % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
- % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
- % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
- % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
- % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
- % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
- % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
- % that's the theory.
- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
- \noindent
- \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
- \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
- \flushcr
-}
-
-% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
-% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
-%
-\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
-
-% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
-% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
-% argument is the same as `1'.
-%
-\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
-\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
- % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
- \def\thearg{#1}%
- \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
- %
- % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
- % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
- % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
- % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
- % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
- \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
- \ifx\rest\empty
- % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
- % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
- % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
- % not equal to itself.
- % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
- %
- % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
- % continuing to look for a <number>.
- %
- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
- \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
- \else
- % It's a letter.
- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
- \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
- \else
- \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
- \numericenumerate
- \fi
-}
-
-% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
-% given in \thearg.
-%
-\def\numericenumerate{%
- \itemno = \thearg
- \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
-}
-
-% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
- \startenumeration{%
- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
- \ifnum\itemno=0
- \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
- alphabet}%
- \fi
- \char\lccode\itemno
- }%
-}
-
-% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
-\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
- \startenumeration{%
- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
- \ifnum\itemno=0
- \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
- alphabet}
- \fi
- \char\uccode\itemno
- }%
-}
-
-% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
-% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
-% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
-%
-\def\startenumeration#1{%
- \advance\itemno by -1
- \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
-}
-
-% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
-% to @enumerate.
-%
-\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
-\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
-\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
-
-
-% @multitable macros
-% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
-%
-% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
-% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
-% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
-% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
-
-% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
-
-% To make preamble:
-%
-% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
-% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
-% @item ...
-%
-% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
-% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
-% columns as desired.
-
-
-% Or use a template:
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-% @item ...
-% using the widest term desired in each column.
-
-% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
-% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
-% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
-% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
-
-% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
-% if they are.
-
-% Sample multitable:
-
-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
-% @item
-% first col stuff
-% @tab
-% second col stuff
-% @tab
-% third col
-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
-% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
-%
-% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
-% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
-% @end multitable
-
-% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
-% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
-% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
-% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
-% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
-% to baseline.
-% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
-%
-\newskip\multitableparskip
-\newskip\multitableparindent
-\newdimen\multitablecolspace
-\newskip\multitablelinespace
-\multitableparskip=0pt
-\multitableparindent=6pt
-\multitablecolspace=12pt
-\multitablelinespace=0pt
-
-% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
-%
-\let\endsetuptable\relax
-\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
-\let\columnfractions\relax
-\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
-\newif\ifsetpercent
-
-% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
-% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
-%
-\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
- \global\advance\colcount by 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
- \setuptable
-}
-
-\newcount\colcount
-\def\setuptable#1{%
- \def\firstarg{#1}%
- \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
- \let\go = \relax
- \else
- \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
- \global\setpercenttrue
- \else
- \ifsetpercent
- \let\go\pickupwholefraction
- \else
- \global\advance\colcount by 1
- \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
- % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
- % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
- % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
- \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
- \else
- \let\go = \setuptable
- \fi%
- \fi
- \go
-}
-
-% multitable-only commands.
-%
-% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
-% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
-% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
-\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
-%
-% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
-% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
-% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
-% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
-\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
-
-% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
-%
-\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
-%
-\envdef\multitable{%
- \vskip\parskip
- \startsavinginserts
- %
- % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
- % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
- % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
- % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
- \def\item{\crcr}%
- %
- \tolerance=9500
- \hbadness=9500
- \setmultitablespacing
- \parskip=\multitableparskip
- \parindent=\multitableparindent
- \overfullrule=0pt
- \global\colcount=0
- %
- \everycr = {%
- \noalign{%
- \global\everytab={}%
- \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
- % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
- \checkinserts
- % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
- %\filbreak
- % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
- % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
- % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
- }%
- }%
- %
- \parsearg\domultitable
-}
-\def\domultitable#1{%
- % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
- \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
- %
- % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
- % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
- % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
- % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
- \halign\bgroup &%
- \global\advance\colcount by 1
- \multistrut
- \vtop{%
- % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
- \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
- %
- % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
- % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
- % the first one.
- %
- % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
- % to the width of each template entry.
- %
- % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
- % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
- % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
- % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
- %
- % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
- \rightskip=0pt
- \ifnum\colcount=1
- % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
- \advance\hsize by\leftskip
- \else
- \ifsetpercent \else
- % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
- % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
- \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
- \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
- \fi
- % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
- % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
- % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
- % For example:
- % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
- % @item @code{#}
- % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
- % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
- % marking characters.
- \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
- }\cr
-}
-\def\Emultitable{%
- \crcr
- \egroup % end the \halign
- \global\setpercentfalse
-}
-
-\def\setmultitablespacing{%
- \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
- %
- % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
- % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
- % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
- % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
-\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
-\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
-\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
-\fi
-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
-%% table. If not, do nothing.
-%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
-\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
- %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi%
-\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
- %% than skip between lines in the table.
-\fi}
-
-
-\message{conditionals,}
-
-% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
-% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
-% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
-% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
-% attempt to close an environment group.
-%
-\def\makecond#1{%
- \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
- \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
-}
-\makecond{iftex}
-\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
-\makecond{ifnothtml}
-\makecond{ifnotinfo}
-\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
-\makecond{ifnotxml}
-
-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
-%
-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
-\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
-\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
-\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
-\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
-\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
-\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
-\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
-\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
-
-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
-%
-% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
-\newcount\doignorecount
-
-\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
- % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
- \obeylines
- \catcode`\@ = \other
- \catcode`\{ = \other
- \catcode`\} = \other
- %
- % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
- \spaceisspace
- %
- % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
- \doignorecount = 0
- %
- % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
- \dodoignore{#1}%
-}
-
-{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
- \obeylines %
- %
- \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
- % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
- %
- % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
- \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
- \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
- %
- % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
- % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
- % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
- \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
- %
- % And now expand that command.
- \doignoretext ^^M%
- }%
-}
-
-\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
- \let\next\doignoretextzzz
- \else % Found a nested condition, ...
- \advance\doignorecount by 1
- \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
- % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
- \fi
- \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
-}
-
-% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
-%
-\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
- \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
- \let\next\enddoignore
- \else % Still inside a nested condition.
- \advance\doignorecount by -1
- \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
- \fi
- \next
-}
-
-% Finish off ignored text.
-{ \obeylines%
- % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
- % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
- % would result in a blank line in the output.
- \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
-}
-
-
-% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
-% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
-%
-% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
-% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
-% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
-% didn't need it.
-% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
-%
-\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
-\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable
- \def\temp{#2}%
- \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
- \ifx\temp\empty
- \next{}%
- \else
- \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
- \fi
- }%
-}
-% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
-\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
-
-% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
-%
-\parseargdef\clear{%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable
- \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
- }%
-}
-
-% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
-\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
-{
- \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
- %
- \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
- \let\value = \expandablevalue
- % We don't want these characters active, ...
- \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
- % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
- % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
- % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
- \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
- }
-}
-
-% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
-% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
-% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
-% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
-% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
-% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
-% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
-%
-\def\expandablevalue#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
- {[No value for ``#1'']}%
- \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
- \else
- \csname SET#1\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-
-% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
-% with @set.
-%
-% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
-%
-\makecond{ifset}
-\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
-\def\doifset#1#2{%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable
- \let\next=\empty
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
- #1% If not set, redefine \next.
- \fi
- \expandafter
- }\next
-}
-\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
-
-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
-% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
-%
-% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
-% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
-% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
-%
-\makecond{ifclear}
-\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
-\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
-
-% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
-% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
-\let\dircategory=\comment
-
-% @defininfoenclose.
-\let\definfoenclose=\comment
-
-
-\message{indexing,}
-% Index generation facilities
-
-% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
-% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
-\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
-
-% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
-% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
-% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
-% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
-% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
-% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
-% for the sake of vms.
-%
-\def\newindex#1{%
- \iflinks
- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
- \fi
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
- \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
-}
-
-% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
-%
-\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
-
-% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
-%
-\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
-%
-\def\newcodeindex#1{%
- \iflinks
- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
- \fi
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
-% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
-%
-% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
-% inside @code.
-%
-\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
-\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
-
-% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
-% #3 the target index (bar).
-\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
- % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
- % closing the target index.
- \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
- % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
- % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
- \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
- \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
- \fi
- % redefine \fooindfile:
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
- \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
- % redefine \fooindex:
- \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
-}
-
-% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
-% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
-% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
-
-% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
-% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
-
-% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
-% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
-
-\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
-\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
-
-% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
-\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
-\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
-
-% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
-% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
-% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
-%
-\def\indexdummies{%
- \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
- \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
- \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
- %
- % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
- % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
- % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
- \let\{ = \mylbrace
- \let\} = \myrbrace
- %
- % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
- % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
- % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
- % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
- % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
- % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
- % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
- % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
- % is still getting written without apparent harm.
- %
- % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
- % help-texinfo, 22may06):
- % @macro funindex {WORD}
- % @findex xyz
- % @end macro
- % ...
- % @funindex commtest
- %
- % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
- %
- % Sample whatsit resulting:
- % .@write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz@endinput }}}
- %
- % So:
- \let\endinput = \empty
- %
- % Do the redefinitions.
- \commondummies
-}
-
-% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
-% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
-% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
-% this will be simpler.
-%
-\def\atdummies{%
- \def\@{@@}%
- \def\ {@ }%
- \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
- \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
- %
- % Do the redefinitions.
- \commondummies
- \otherbackslash
-}
-
-% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
-%
-\def\commondummies{%
- %
- % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
- % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
- % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
- % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
- % from whatever follows.
- %
- % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
- % space.
- %
- % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
- % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
- % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
- %
- \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
- \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
- \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
- %
- \commondummiesnofonts
- %
- \definedummyletter\_%
- %
- % Non-English letters.
- \definedummyword\AA
- \definedummyword\AE
- \definedummyword\L
- \definedummyword\OE
- \definedummyword\O
- \definedummyword\aa
- \definedummyword\ae
- \definedummyword\l
- \definedummyword\oe
- \definedummyword\o
- \definedummyword\ss
- \definedummyword\exclamdown
- \definedummyword\questiondown
- \definedummyword\ordf
- \definedummyword\ordm
- %
- % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
- \definedummyword\bf
- \definedummyword\gtr
- \definedummyword\hat
- \definedummyword\less
- \definedummyword\sf
- \definedummyword\sl
- \definedummyword\tclose
- \definedummyword\tt
- %
- \definedummyword\LaTeX
- \definedummyword\TeX
- %
- % Assorted special characters.
- \definedummyword\bullet
- \definedummyword\comma
- \definedummyword\copyright
- \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
- \definedummyword\dots
- \definedummyword\enddots
- \definedummyword\equiv
- \definedummyword\error
- \definedummyword\euro
- \definedummyword\guillemetleft
- \definedummyword\guillemetright
- \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
- \definedummyword\guilsinglright
- \definedummyword\expansion
- \definedummyword\minus
- \definedummyword\ogonek
- \definedummyword\pounds
- \definedummyword\point
- \definedummyword\print
- \definedummyword\quotedblbase
- \definedummyword\quotedblleft
- \definedummyword\quotedblright
- \definedummyword\quoteleft
- \definedummyword\quoteright
- \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
- \definedummyword\result
- \definedummyword\textdegree
- %
- % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
- \macrolist
- %
- \normalturnoffactive
- %
- % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
- % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
- \makevalueexpandable
-}
-
-% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
-%
-\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
- % Control letters and accents.
- \definedummyletter\!%
- \definedummyaccent\"%
- \definedummyaccent\'%
- \definedummyletter\*%
- \definedummyaccent\,%
- \definedummyletter\.%
- \definedummyletter\/%
- \definedummyletter\:%
- \definedummyaccent\=%
- \definedummyletter\?%
- \definedummyaccent\^%
- \definedummyaccent\`%
- \definedummyaccent\~%
- \definedummyword\u
- \definedummyword\v
- \definedummyword\H
- \definedummyword\dotaccent
- \definedummyword\ogonek
- \definedummyword\ringaccent
- \definedummyword\tieaccent
- \definedummyword\ubaraccent
- \definedummyword\udotaccent
- \definedummyword\dotless
- %
- % Texinfo font commands.
- \definedummyword\b
- \definedummyword\i
- \definedummyword\r
- \definedummyword\sc
- \definedummyword\t
- %
- % Commands that take arguments.
- \definedummyword\acronym
- \definedummyword\cite
- \definedummyword\code
- \definedummyword\command
- \definedummyword\dfn
- \definedummyword\emph
- \definedummyword\env
- \definedummyword\file
- \definedummyword\kbd
- \definedummyword\key
- \definedummyword\math
- \definedummyword\option
- \definedummyword\pxref
- \definedummyword\ref
- \definedummyword\samp
- \definedummyword\strong
- \definedummyword\tie
- \definedummyword\uref
- \definedummyword\url
- \definedummyword\var
- \definedummyword\verb
- \definedummyword\w
- \definedummyword\xref
-}
-
-% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
-% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
-% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
-% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
-%
-\def\indexnofonts{%
- % Accent commands should become @asis.
- \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
- % We can just ignore other control letters.
- \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
- % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
- \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
- %
- \commondummiesnofonts
- %
- % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
- % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
- % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
- %\let\tt=\asis
- %
- \def\ { }%
- \def\@{@}%
- % how to handle braces?
- \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
- %
- % Non-English letters.
- \def\AA{AA}%
- \def\AE{AE}%
- \def\L{L}%
- \def\OE{OE}%
- \def\O{O}%
- \def\aa{aa}%
- \def\ae{ae}%
- \def\l{l}%
- \def\oe{oe}%
- \def\o{o}%
- \def\ss{ss}%
- \def\exclamdown{!}%
- \def\questiondown{?}%
- \def\ordf{a}%
- \def\ordm{o}%
- %
- \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
- \def\TeX{TeX}%
- %
- % Assorted special characters.
- % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
- \def\bullet{bullet}%
- \def\comma{,}%
- \def\copyright{copyright}%
- \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
- \def\dots{...}%
- \def\enddots{...}%
- \def\equiv{==}%
- \def\error{error}%
- \def\euro{euro}%
- \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
- \def\guillemetright{>>}%
- \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
- \def\guilsinglright{>}%
- \def\expansion{==>}%
- \def\minus{-}%
- \def\pounds{pounds}%
- \def\point{.}%
- \def\print{-|}%
- \def\quotedblbase{"}%
- \def\quotedblleft{"}%
- \def\quotedblright{"}%
- \def\quoteleft{`}%
- \def\quoteright{'}%
- \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
- \def\result{=>}%
- \def\textdegree{degrees}%
- %
- % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
- % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
- % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
- % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
- % that starts with \.
- %
- % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
- % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
- % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
- %
- \macrolist
-}
-
-\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
-\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
-
-% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
-% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
-
-% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
-% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
-% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
-% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
-%
-\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
- \iflinks
- {%
- % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
- \toks0 = {#2}%
- % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
- \def\thirdarg{#3}%
- \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
- \fi
- %
- \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
- %
- \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
- }%
- \fi
-}
-
-% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
-%
-\def\dosubindwrite{%
- % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
- \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
- \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
- \fi
- %
- % Remember, we are within a group.
- \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
- \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
- % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
- %
- % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
- % get the string to sort by.
- {\indexnofonts
- \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
- \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
- }%
- %
- % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
- % the original text, including any font commands. We write
- % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
- % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
- % sorted result.
- \edef\temp{%
- \write\writeto{%
- \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
- }%
- \temp
-}
-
-% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
-%
-% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
-% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
-% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
-% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
-% sequences like this:
-% @end defun
-% @tindex whatever
-% @defun ...
-% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
-% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
-% the previous defun.
-%
-% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
-% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
-%
-% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
-%
-% But wait, there is a catch there:
-% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
-% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
-% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
-% representation of the skip.
-%
-% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
-% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
-%
-\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
-%
-\newskip\whatsitskip
-\newcount\whatsitpenalty
-%
-% ..., ready, GO:
-%
-\def\safewhatsit#1{%
-\ifhmode
- #1%
-\else
- % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
- \whatsitskip = \lastskip
- \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
- \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
- %
- % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
- % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
- % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
- % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
- % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
- \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
- \else
- \vskip-\whatsitskip
- \fi
- %
- #1%
- %
- \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
- % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
- % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
- % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
- % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
- % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
- %
- % @deffn deffn-whatever
- % @vindex index-whatever
- % Description.
- % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
- % and the "Description." paragraph.
- \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
- \else
- % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
- % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
- % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
- \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
- \fi
-\fi
-}
-
-% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
-% or
-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
-% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
-% containing these kinds of lines:
-% \initial {c}
-% before the first topic whose initial is c
-% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
-% for a topic that is used without subtopics
-% \primary {topic}
-% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
-% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
-% for each subtopic.
-
-% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
-% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
-
-\def\findex {\fnindex}
-\def\kindex {\kyindex}
-\def\cindex {\cpindex}
-\def\vindex {\vrindex}
-\def\tindex {\tpindex}
-\def\pindex {\pgindex}
-
-\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
-{\obeylines %
-\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
-\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
-
-% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
-
-% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
-% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
-%
-\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
- \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
- %
- \smallfonts \rm
- \tolerance = 9500
- \plainfrenchspacing
- \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
- %
- % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
- % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
- % \initial {@}
- % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
- % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
- \catcode`\@ = 11
- \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
- \ifeof 1
- % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
- % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
- % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
- % there is some text.
- \putwordIndexNonexistent
- \else
- %
- % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
- % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
- % it can discover if there is anything in it.
- \read 1 to \temp
- \ifeof 1
- \putwordIndexIsEmpty
- \else
- % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
- % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
- % to make right now.
- \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
- \catcode`\\ = 0
- \escapechar = `\\
- \begindoublecolumns
- \input \jobname.#1s
- \enddoublecolumns
- \fi
- \fi
- \closein 1
-\endgroup}
-
-% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
-% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
-
-\def\initial#1{{%
- % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
- \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
- %
- % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
- \removelastskip
- %
- % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
- \nobreak
- \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
- \penalty 0
- \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
- %
- % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
- % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
- % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
- % we need before each entry, but it's better.
- %
- % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
- \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
- \leftline{\secbf #1}%
- % Do our best not to break after the initial.
- \nobreak
- \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
-}}
-
-% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
-% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
-% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
-%
-% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
-% \def\entry#1#2{...
-% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
-% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
-% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
-%
-% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
-% --kasal, 21nov03
-\def\entry{%
- \begingroup
- %
- % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
- % affect previous text.
- \par
- %
- % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
- \parfillskip = 0in
- %
- % No extra space above this paragraph.
- \parskip = 0in
- %
- % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
- \finalhyphendemerits = 0
- %
- % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
- % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
- % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
- % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
- % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
- %
- % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
- % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
- \hangindent = 2em
- %
- % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
- % with blank space.
- \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
- %
- % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
- % columns.
- \vskip 0pt plus1pt
- %
- % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
- \afterassignment\doentry
- \let\temp =
-}
-\def\doentry{%
- \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
- \noindent
- \aftergroup\finishentry
- % And now comes the text of the entry.
-}
-\def\finishentry#1{%
- % #1 is the page number.
- %
- % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
- % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
- % cursed by a Unix daemon.
- \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
- \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
- \ %
- \else
- %
- % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
- % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
- % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
- \hfil\penalty50
- \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
- %
- % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
- % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
- % \hbox ensues.
- \ifpdf
- \pdfgettoks#1.%
- \ \the\toksA
- \else
- \ #1%
- \fi
- \fi
- \par
- \endgroup
-}
-
-% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
-\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
- \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
-
-\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
-
-\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
-\def\secondary#1#2{{%
- \parfillskip=0in
- \parskip=0in
- \hangindent=1in
- \hangafter=1
- \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
- \ifpdf
- \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
- \else
- #2
- \fi
- \par
-}}
-
-% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
-% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
-\catcode`\@=11
-
-\newbox\partialpage
-\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
-
-\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
- % Grab any single-column material above us.
- \output = {%
- %
- % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
- % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
- % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
- % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
- % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
- % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
- % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
- \ifvoid\partialpage \else
- \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
- \fi
- %
- \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
- % Unvbox the main output page.
- \unvbox\PAGE
- \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
- }%
- }%
- \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
- %
- % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
- \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
- %
- % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
- % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
- % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
- % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
- % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
- %
- % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
- % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
- % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
- % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
- % as it did when we hard-coded it.
- %
- % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
- % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
- % been clobbered.
- %
- \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
- \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
- \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
- %
- % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
- % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
- \vsize = 2\vsize
-}
-
-% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
-% the last.
-%
-\def\doublecolumnout{%
- \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
- % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
- % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
- % previous page.
- \dimen@ = \vsize
- \divide\dimen@ by 2
- \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
- %
- % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
- \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
- \onepageout\pagesofar
- \unvbox255
- \penalty\outputpenalty
-}
-%
-% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
-% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
-\def\pagesofar{%
- \unvbox\partialpage
- %
- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
- \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
- \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
-}
-%
-% All done with double columns.
-\def\enddoublecolumns{%
- % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
- % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
- % following situation:
- %
- % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
- % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
- % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
- % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
- % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
- % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
- % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
- % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
- % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
- % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
- % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
- % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
- % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
- % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
- % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
- % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
- % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
- % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
- % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
- %
- % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
- % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
- \penalty0
- %
- \output = {%
- % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
- % current page, no automatic page break.
- \balancecolumns
- %
- % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
- % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
- % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
- % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
- % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
- % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
- % the output somewhat more palatable.)
- \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
- }%
- \eject
- \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
- %
- % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
- % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
- % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
- % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
- \pagegoal = \vsize
-}
-%
-% Called at the end of the double column material.
-\def\balancecolumns{%
- \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
- \dimen@ = \ht0
- \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
- \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
- \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
- %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
- \splittopskip = \topskip
- % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
- {%
- \vbadness = 10000
- \loop
- \global\setbox3 = \copy0
- \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
- \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
- \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
- \repeat
- }%
- %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
- \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
- \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
- %
- \pagesofar
-}
-\catcode`\@ = \other
-
-
-\message{sectioning,}
-% Chapters, sections, etc.
-
-% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
-% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
-% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
-% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
-% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
-\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
-\newcount\chapno
-\newcount\secno \secno=0
-\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
-\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
-
-% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
-\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
-%
-% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
-% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
-% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
-% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
-%
-\def\appendixletter{%
- \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
- % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
- % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
- % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
- % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
- \else\char\the\appendixno
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-
-% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
-% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
-% these. @section does likewise.
-\def\thischapter{}
-\def\thischapternum{}
-\def\thischaptername{}
-\def\thissection{}
-\def\thissectionnum{}
-\def\thissectionname{}
-
-\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
-
-% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
-\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
-\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
-
-% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
-\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
-\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
-
-% we only have subsub.
-\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
-%
-% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
-% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
-\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
-%
-% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
-% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
-\def\chapheadtype{N}
-
-% Choose a heading macro
-% #1 is heading type
-% #2 is heading level
-% #3 is text for heading
-\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
- % Compute the abs. sec. level:
- \absseclevel=#2
- \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
- % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
- \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
- \absseclevel = 0
- \else
- \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
- \absseclevel = 3
- \fi
- \fi
- % The heading type:
- \def\headtype{#1}%
- \if \headtype U%
- \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
- \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
- \fi
- \else
- % Check for appendix sections:
- \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
- \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
- \else
- \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
- \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
- \fi\fi
- \fi
- % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
- \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
- \def\headtype{U}%
- \else
- \chardef\unmlevel = 3
- \fi
- \fi
- % Now print the heading:
- \if \headtype U%
- \ifcase\absseclevel
- \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
- \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
- \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
- \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
- \fi
- \else
- \if \headtype A%
- \ifcase\absseclevel
- \appendixzzz{#3}%
- \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
- \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
- \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
- \fi
- \else
- \ifcase\absseclevel
- \chapterzzz{#3}%
- \or \seczzz{#3}%
- \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
- \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% an interface:
-\def\numhead{\genhead N}
-\def\apphead{\genhead A}
-\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
-
-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
-% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
-%
-% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
-% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
-\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
-%
-\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
-\def\chapterzzz#1{%
- % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
- % as an @include file.
- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
- \global\advance\chapno by 1
- %
- % Used for \float.
- \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
- \resetallfloatnos
- %
- \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
- %
- % Write the actual heading.
- \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
- %
- % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
- \global\let\section = \numberedsec
- \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
-\def\appendixzzz#1{%
- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
- \global\advance\appendixno by 1
- \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
- \resetallfloatnos
- %
- \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
- \message{\appendixnum}%
- %
- \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
- %
- \global\let\section = \appendixsec
- \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
-\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
- \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
- %
- % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
- \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
- \resetallfloatnos
- %
- % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
- % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
- % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
- % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
- % to be executed, not expanded).
- %
- % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
- % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
- % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
- % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
- % the toc entries.)
- \toks0 = {#1}%
- \message{(\the\toks0)}%
- %
- \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
- %
- \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
- \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
- \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
-}
-
-% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
-\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
- % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
- % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
- % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
- \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
- \unnmhead0{#1}%
- \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-}
-
-% @top is like @unnumbered.
-\let\top\unnumbered
-
-% Sections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
-\def\seczzz#1{%
- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
-\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
-}
-\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
-\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
-}
-
-% Subsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
- {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
- {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
-}
-
-% Subsubsections.
-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
- {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
- {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
- {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
-}
-
-% These macros control what the section commands do, according
-% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
-% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
-\let\section = \numberedsec
-\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
-\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
-
-% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
-
-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
-% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
-% overlong headings to fold.
-% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
-% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
-% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
-% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
-
-\def\majorheading{%
- {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
- \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
-}
-
-\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
-\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
- {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rmisbold #1\hfill}}%
- \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
- \suppressfirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
-\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
-
-% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
-% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
-% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
-
-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
-\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
-
-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
-% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
-
-\newskip\chapheadingskip
-
-\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
-\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
-% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
-% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
-% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
-\def\chapoddpage{%
- \chappager
- \ifodd\pageno \else
- \begingroup
- \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
- \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
- \hbox to 0pt{}%
- \chappager
- \endgroup
- \fi
-}
-
-\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGon{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
-
-\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
-
-\CHAPPAGon
-
-% Chapter opening.
-%
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
-% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
-%
-% To test against our argument.
-\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
-\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
-\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
-%
-\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
- % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
- \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
- \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
- \gdef\thissection{}}%
- %
- \def\temptype{#2}%
- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
- \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
- \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
- \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
- \gdef\thischapter{}}%
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
- \toks0={#1}%
- \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
- \noexpand\thischaptername}%
- }%
- \else
- \toks0={#1}%
- \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
- \noexpand\thischaptername}%
- }%
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
- % the preceding space.
- \safewhatsit\domark
- %
- % Insert the chapter heading break.
- \pchapsepmacro
- %
- % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
- % between here and the heading.
- \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
- \domark
- %
- {%
- \chapfonts \rmisbold
- %
- % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
- % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
- % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
- %
- % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
- % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
- \def\toctype{unnchap}%
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
- \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
- \def\toctype{omit}%
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
- \def\toctype{app}%
- \else
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
- \def\toctype{numchap}%
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
- % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
- % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
- \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
- %
- % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
- % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
- % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
- % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
- % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
- \donoderef{#2}%
- %
- % Typeset the actual heading.
- \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
- \unhbox0 #1\par}%
- }%
- \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
- \nobreak
-}
-
-% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
-\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
-\def\centerparameters{%
- \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
- \leftskip = \rightskip
- \parfillskip = 0pt
-}
-
-
-% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
-% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
-%
-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
-%
-\def\unnchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
- \rmisbold #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
-\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
-\par\penalty 5000 %
-}
-\def\centerchfopen #1{%
-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
- \parindent=0pt
- \hfill {\rmisbold #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
-}
-\def\CHAPFopen{%
- \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
- \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
-
-
-% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
-% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
-%
-\newskip\secheadingskip
-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
-
-% Subsection titles.
-\newskip\subsecheadingskip
-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
-
-% Subsubsection titles.
-\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
-\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
-
-
-% Print any size, any type, section title.
-%
-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
-% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
-% section number.
-%
-\def\seckeyword{sec}
-%
-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
- {%
- % Switch to the right set of fonts.
- \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rmisbold
- %
- \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
- \def\temptype{#3}%
- %
- % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
- \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
- \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
- \fi
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
- % Don't redefine \thissection.
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
- \toks0={#1}%
- \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
- \noexpand\thissectionname}%
- }%
- \fi
- \else
- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
- \toks0={#1}%
- \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
- \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
- \noexpand\thissectionname}%
- }%
- \fi
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
- % the preceding space.
- \safewhatsit\domark
- %
- % Insert space above the heading.
- \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
- %
- % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
- % between here and the heading.
- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
- \domark
- %
- % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
- \def\toctype{unn}%
- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
- % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
- % and don't redefine \lastsection.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
- \def\toctype{omit}%
- \let\sectionlevel=\empty
- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
- \def\toctype{app}%
- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
- \else
- \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
- \def\toctype{num}%
- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
- \fi\fi\fi
- %
- % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
- \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
- %
- % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
- % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
- \donoderef{#3}%
- %
- % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
- % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
- % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
- % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
- % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
- % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
- \nobreak
- %
- % Output the actual section heading.
- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
- \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
- \unhbox0 #1}%
- }%
- % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
- % Don't allow stretch, though.
- \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
- %
- % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
- % was followed by glue.
- \nobreak
- %
- % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
- % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
- % discardable item.)
- \vskip-\parskip
- %
- % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
- % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
- % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
- %
- % @section sec-whatever
- % @deffn def-whatever
- \penalty 10001
-}
-
-
-\message{toc,}
-% Table of contents.
-\newwrite\tocfile
-
-% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
-% Called from @chapter, etc.
-%
-% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
-% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
-% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
-% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
-% destination to jump to.
-%
-% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
-% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
-% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
-% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
-%
-\newif\iftocfileopened
-\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
-%
-\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
- \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
- \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
- \iftocfileopened\else
- \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
- \global\tocfileopenedtrue
- \fi
- %
- \iflinks
- {\atdummies
- \edef\temp{%
- \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
- \temp
- }%
- \fi
- \fi
- %
- % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
- % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
- % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
- % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
- % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
- % `1', and two named `2'.
- \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
-}
-
-
-% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
-% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
-% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
-%
-\def\activecatcodes{%
- \catcode`\"=\active
- \catcode`\$=\active
- \catcode`\<=\active
- \catcode`\>=\active
- \catcode`\\=\active
- \catcode`\^=\active
- \catcode`\_=\active
- \catcode`\|=\active
- \catcode`\~=\active
-}
-
-
-% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
-\def\readtocfile{%
- \setupdatafile
- \activecatcodes
- \input \tocreadfilename
-}
-
-\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
-\newcount\savepageno
-\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
-
-% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
-%
-\def\startcontents#1{%
- % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
- % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
- % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
- % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
- \contentsalignmacro
- \immediate\closeout\tocfile
- %
- % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
- % It is abundantly clear what they are.
- \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
- %
- \savepageno = \pageno
- \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
- \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
- \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
- %
- % Roman numerals for page numbers.
- \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
-}
-
-% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
-% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
-%
-\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
-
-% Normal (long) toc.
-%
-\def\contents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
- \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \readtocfile
- \fi
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \pdfmakeoutlines
- \fi
- \closein 1
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-
-% And just the chapters.
-\def\summarycontents{%
- \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
- %
- \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
- \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
- \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
- % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
- \secfonts
- \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
- \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
- \rm
- \hyphenpenalty = 10000
- \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
- \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
- \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \readtocfile
- \fi
- \closein 1
- \vfill \eject
- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
- \endgroup
- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
- \global\pageno = \savepageno
-}
-\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
-
-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
-% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
-%
-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
- % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
- % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
- % But use \hss just in case.
- % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
- % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
- %
- % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
- % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
- % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
- % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
- % there are before deciding ...
- \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
-}
-
-% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
-% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
-% The last argument is the page number.
-% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
-
-% Chapters, in the main contents.
-\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-%
-% Chapters, in the short toc.
-% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
- \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
-}
-
-% Appendices, in the main contents.
-% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
-%
-\def\appendixbox#1{%
- % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
- \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
-%
-\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-
-% Unnumbered chapters.
-\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
-\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
-
-% Sections.
-\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
-\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% Subsections.
-\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% And subsubsections.
-\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
-\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
-\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
-
-% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
-% Same as \defaultparindent.
-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
-
-% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
-% page number.
-%
-% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
-% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
-\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
- \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
- \begingroup
- \chapentryfonts
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
- \endgroup
- \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
-}
-
-\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
- \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
-\endgroup}
-
-% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
-\let\tocentry = \entry
-
-% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
-\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
-
-\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
-
-\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
-\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
-\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
-
-
-\message{environments,}
-% @foo ... @end foo.
-
-% Markup style infrastructure. \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
-% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
-% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
-% style and the set of \ifmarkupSTYLE switches for all styles
-% currently in effect.
-\newif\ifmarkupvar
-\newif\ifmarkupsamp
-\newif\ifmarkupkey
-%\newif\ifmarkupfile % @file == @samp.
-%\newif\ifmarkupoption % @option == @samp.
-\newif\ifmarkupcode
-\newif\ifmarkupkbd
-%\newif\ifmarkupenv % @env == @code.
-%\newif\ifmarkupcommand % @command == @code.
-\newif\ifmarkuptex % @tex (and part of @math, for now).
-\newif\ifmarkupexample
-\newif\ifmarkupverb
-\newif\ifmarkupverbatim
-
-\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
-
-\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
- \csname markup#1true\endcsname
- \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
- \markupstylesetup
-}
-
-\let\markupstylesetup\empty
-
-\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
- \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
- \def#1%
-}
-
-% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
-\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
- \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
-}
-
-\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
- \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
-}
-
-{
-\catcode`\'=\active
-\catcode`\`=\active
-
-\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
-\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
-
-\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
-\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
-
-\gdef\markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft{\let`\noligaturesquoteleft}
-}
-
-\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
-\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
-\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
-\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
-\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
-\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
-\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
-\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
-
-\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
-\let\markupsetuplqkbd \markupsetnoligaturesquoteleft
-
-% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
-% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
-% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
-% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
-% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
-% regular 0x27.
-%
-\def\codequoteright{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
- '%
- \else \char'15 \fi
- \else \char'15 \fi
-}
-%
-% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
-% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
-% the code environments to do likewise.
-%
-\def\codequoteleft{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
- % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
- % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
- \relax`%
- \else \char'22 \fi
- \else \char'22 \fi
-}
-
-% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
-\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
-
-% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
-%
-% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
-% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
-%
-\def\point{$\star$}
-\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
-\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
-\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
-\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
-\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
-
-% The @error{} command.
-% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
-%
-\newbox\errorbox
-%
-{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
-\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
-% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
-%
-\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
- \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
- \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
- \vbox{%
- \hrule height\dimen2
- \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
- \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
- \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
- \hrule height\dimen2}
- \hfil}
-%
-\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
-
-% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
-% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
-
-\envdef\tex{%
- \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
- \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
- \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
- \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
- \catcode `\%=14
- \catcode `\+=\other
- \catcode `\"=\other
- \catcode `\|=\other
- \catcode `\<=\other
- \catcode `\>=\other
- \catcode`\`=\other
- \catcode`\'=\other
- \escapechar=`\\
- %
- \let\b=\ptexb
- \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
- \let\c=\ptexc
- \let\,=\ptexcomma
- \let\.=\ptexdot
- \let\dots=\ptexdots
- \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
- \let\!=\ptexexclam
- \let\i=\ptexi
- \let\indent=\ptexindent
- \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
- \let\{=\ptexlbrace
- \let\+=\tabalign
- \let\}=\ptexrbrace
- \let\/=\ptexslash
- \let\*=\ptexstar
- \let\t=\ptext
- \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
- \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
- %
- \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
- \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
- \def\@{@}%
-}
-% There is no need to define \Etex.
-
-% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
-% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
-% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
-
-% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
-\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
-
-% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
-% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
-% have any width.
-\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
-
-% This space is always present above and below environments.
-\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
-
-% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
-% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
-% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
-%
-\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
- % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
- % \sectionheading, q.v.
- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
- \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
- \endgraf
- \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
- \removelastskip
- % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
- % or better ...
- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
- \vskip\envskipamount
- \fi
- \fi
-}}
-
-\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
-
-% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
-% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
-\let\nonarrowing=\relax
-
-% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
-% environment contents.
-\font\circle=lcircle10
-\newdimen\circthick
-\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
-\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
-\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
-%
-\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
-\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
-\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
-\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
-\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
- \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
- \hskip\rskip}}
-\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
- \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
- \hskip\rskip}}
-%
-\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
-
-\envdef\cartouche{%
- \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
- \startsavinginserts
- \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
- \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
- \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
- \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
- \cartouter=\hsize
- \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
- % side, and for 6pt waste from
- % each corner char, and rule thickness
- \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
- % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
- \let\nonarrowing = t%
- \vbox\bgroup
- \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
- \carttop
- \hbox\bgroup
- \hskip\lskip
- \vrule\kern3pt
- \vbox\bgroup
- \kern3pt
- \hsize=\cartinner
- \baselineskip=\normbskip
- \lineskip=\normlskip
- \parskip=\normpskip
- \vskip -\parskip
- \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
-}
-\def\Ecartouche{%
- \ifhmode\par\fi
- \kern3pt
- \egroup
- \kern3pt\vrule
- \hskip\rskip
- \egroup
- \cartbot
- \egroup
- \checkinserts
-}
-
-
-% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
-% inside a group.
-\def\nonfillstart{%
- \aboveenvbreak
- \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
- \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
- \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
- \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
- \parskip = 0pt
- \parindent = 0pt
- \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
- \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
- \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
- \else
- \let\nonarrowing = \relax
- \fi
- \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
-}
-
-% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
-% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
-% This affects the following displayed environments:
-% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
-%
-\def\smallword{small}
-\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
-\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
-\def\setnormaldispenv{%
- \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
- % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
- % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
- % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
- % to change the fonts afterward.
- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \fi
-}
-\def\setsmalldispenv{%
- \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
- \else
- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
- \smallexamplefonts \rm
- \fi
-}
-
-% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
-% Let's do it by one command:
-\def\makedispenv #1#2{
- \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
- \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
- \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
- \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
-}
-
-% Define two synonyms:
-\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
- \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
- \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
-}
-
-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
-%
-% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
-% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
-%
-\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
- \nonfillstart
- \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
- \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
- \gobble % eat return
-}
-% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
-%
-\makedispenv {display}{%
- \nonfillstart
- \gobble
-}
-
-% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
-%
-\makedispenv{format}{%
- \let\nonarrowing = t%
- \nonfillstart
- \gobble
-}
-
-% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
-\envdef\flushleft{%
- \let\nonarrowing = t%
- \nonfillstart
- \gobble
-}
-\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
-
-% @flushright.
-%
-\envdef\flushright{%
- \let\nonarrowing = t%
- \nonfillstart
- \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
- \gobble
-}
-\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
-
-
-% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
-% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
-% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
-% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
-%
-\def\quotationstart{%
- {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
- \parindent=0pt
- %
- % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
- \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
- \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
- \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
- \else
- \let\nonarrowing = \relax
- \fi
- \parsearg\quotationlabel
-}
-
-\envdef\quotation{%
- \setnormaldispenv
- \quotationstart
-}
-
-\envdef\smallquotation{%
- \setsmalldispenv
- \quotationstart
-}
-\let\Esmallquotation = \Equotation
-
-% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
-% doing normal filling.
-%
-\def\Equotation{%
- \par
- \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
- % indent a bit.
- \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
- \fi
- {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
-}
-
-% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
-\def\quotationlabel#1{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \ifx\temp\empty \else
- {\bf #1: }%
- \fi
-}
-
-
-% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
-% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
-% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
-% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
-%
-% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
-%
-% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
-% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
-% verbatim line.
-\def\dospecials{%
- \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
- \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
- \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
- % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
- % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
- % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
- %\do\`\do\'%
-}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 380
-\def\uncatcodespecials{%
- \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
-%
-% Setup for the @verb command.
-%
-% Eight spaces for a tab
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\setupverb{%
- \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
- \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
- \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
- \tabeightspaces
- % Respect line breaks,
- % print special symbols as themselves, and
- % make each space count
- % must do in this order:
- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
-}
-
-% Setup for the @verbatim environment
-%
-% Real tab expansion
-\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
-%
-\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
-%
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \gdef\tabexpand{%
- \catcode`\^^I=\active
- \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
- \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
- \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
- \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
- \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
- \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
- }%
- }
-\endgroup
-
-% start the verbatim environment.
-\def\setupverbatim{%
- \let\nonarrowing = t%
- \nonfillstart
- % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
- \tt
- \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
- \tabexpand
- \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
- % Respect line breaks,
- % print special symbols as themselves, and
- % make each space count
- % must do in this order:
- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
- \everypar{\starttabbox}%
-}
-
-% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
-% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
-% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
-%
-% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
-%
-% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
- \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
-\endgroup
-%
-\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
-%
-%
-% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
-% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
-%
-% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
-%
-% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
-% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
-%
-% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
-%
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\ =\active
- \obeylines %
- % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
- % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
- % line in the output.
- \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
- % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
- % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
-\endgroup
-%
-\envdef\verbatim{%
- \setupverbatim\doverbatim
-}
-\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
-
-
-% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
-%
-\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
-%
-\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
- {%
- \makevalueexpandable
- \setupverbatim
- \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
- \input #1
- \afterenvbreak
- }%
-}
-
-% @copying ... @end copying.
-% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
-%
-% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
-% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
-% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
-% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
-% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
-% possible is very desirable.
-%
-\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
-\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
-%
-\def\insertcopying{%
- \begingroup
- \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
- \scanexp\copyingtext
- \endgroup
-}
-
-
-\message{defuns,}
-% @defun etc.
-
-\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
-\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
-\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
-\newcount\defunpenalty
-
-% Start the processing of @deffn:
-\def\startdefun{%
- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
- \medbreak
- \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
- % following @def command, see below.
- \else
- % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
- % which is there to keep the function description together with its
- % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
- % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
- % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
- % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
- % a break between a section heading and a defun.
- %
- % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
- % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
- % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
- % @def command.
- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
- %
- % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
- % But do insert the glue.
- \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
- \fi
- %
- \parindent=0in
- \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
-}
-
-\def\dodefunx#1{%
- % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
- \checkenv#1%
- %
- % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
- % It's not a great place, though.
- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
- %
- % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
- \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
-}
-\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
-
-% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
-%
-\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
- \begingroup
- % call \deffnheader:
- #1#2 \endheader
- % common ending:
- \interlinepenalty = 10000
- \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
- \endgraf
- \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
- \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
- % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
- % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
- \checkparencounts
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
-
-% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
-% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
-%
-\def\makedefun#1{%
- \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
- \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
- \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
- \temp
-}
-
-% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
-%
-% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
-% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
-%
-\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
- \envdef#1{%
- \startdefun
- \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
- }%
- \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
- \def#3%
-}
-
-%%% Untyped functions:
-
-% @deffn category name args
-\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
-
-% @deffn category class name args
-\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-
-% \defopon {category on}class name args
-\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
-%
-\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
- % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
- \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Typed functions:
-
-% @deftypefn category type name args
-\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
-
-% @deftypeop category class type name args
-\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
-
-% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
-\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
-%
-\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
- \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Typed variables:
-
-% @deftypevr category type var args
-\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
-
-% @deftypecv category class type var args
-\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-
-% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
-\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
-
-% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
-%
-\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
- \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
-}
-
-%%% Untyped variables:
-
-% @defvr category var args
-\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
-
-% @defcv category class var args
-\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
-
-% \defcvof {category of}class var args
-\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
-
-%%% Type:
-% @deftp category name args
-\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
- \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
- \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
-}
-
-% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
-\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
-\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
-\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
-\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
-\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
-\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
-\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
-
-% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
-% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
-% #2 is the return type, if any.
-% #3 is the function name.
-%
-% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
-%
-\def\defname#1#2#3{%
- % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
- %
- % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
- % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
- % just below it.
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
- %
- % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
- % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
- % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
- \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
- % The continuations:
- \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
- % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
- \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
- %
- % Put the type name to the right margin.
- \noindent
- \hbox to 0pt{%
- \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
- % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
- \kern\leftskip
- % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
- }%
- %
- % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
- \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
- {%
- % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
- % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
- % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
- % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
- % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
- % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
- % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
- % one has made identifiers using them :).
- \df \tt
- \def\temp{#2}% return value type
- \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
- #3% output function name
- }%
- {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
- %
- \boldbrax
- % arguments will be output next, if any.
-}
-
-% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
-% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
-% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
-% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
-%
-\def\defunargs#1{%
- % use sl by default (not ttsl),
- % tt for the names.
- \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
- %
- % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
- % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
- \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
- #1%
- \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
-}
-
-% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
-%
-\def\activeparens{%
- \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
- \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
- \catcode`\&=\active
-}
-
-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
-
-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
-{
- \activeparens
- \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
- \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
- \global\let& = \&
-
- \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
- \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
-}
-
-\newcount\parencount
-
-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
-\newif\ifampseen
-\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
-
-\def\parenfont{%
- \ifampseen
- % At the first level, print parens in roman,
- % otherwise use the default font.
- \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
- \else
- % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
- % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
- \sf
- \fi
-}
-\def\infirstlevel#1{%
- \ifampseen
- \ifnum\parencount=1
- #1%
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
-
-\def\opnr{%
- \global\advance\parencount by 1
- {\parenfont(}%
- \infirstlevel \bfafterword
-}
-\def\clnr{%
- {\parenfont)}%
- \infirstlevel \sl
- \global\advance\parencount by -1
-}
-
-\newcount\brackcount
-\def\lbrb{%
- \global\advance\brackcount by 1
- {\bf[}%
-}
-\def\rbrb{%
- {\bf]}%
- \global\advance\brackcount by -1
-}
-
-\def\checkparencounts{%
- \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
- \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
-}
-% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
-% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
-\def\badparencount{%
- \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
- \global\parencount=0
-}
-\def\badbrackcount{%
- \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
- \global\brackcount=0
-}
-
-
-\message{macros,}
-% @macro.
-
-% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
-% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
- \newwrite\macscribble
- \def\scantokens#1{%
- \toks0={#1}%
- \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
- \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
- \immediate\closeout\macscribble
- \input \jobname.tmp
- }
-\fi
-
-\def\scanmacro#1{%
- \begingroup
- \newlinechar`\^^M
- \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
- % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
- % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
- % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
- % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
- % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
- \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
- % ... and \example
- \spaceisspace
- %
- % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
- % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
- % --kasal, 29nov03
- \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
- \endgroup
-}
-
-\def\scanexp#1{%
- \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
- \temp
-}
-
-\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
-\newtoks\macname % Macro name
-\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
-
-% List of all defined macros in the form
-% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
-% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
-% if there is a need.
-\def\macrolist{}
-
-% Add the macro to \macrolist
-\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
-\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
- \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
-}
-
-% Utility routines.
-% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
-% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
-% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
-%
-\def\cslet#1#2{%
- \expandafter\let
- \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname#2\endcsname
-}
-
-% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
-% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
-{\catcode`\@=11
-\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
-\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
-\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
-\def\unbrace#1{#1}
-\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
-}
-
-% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
-\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
-\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
-\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
-}
-
-% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
-% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
-
-% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
-% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
-% confine the change to the current group.
-
-% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
-% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
-% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
-
-\def\scanctxt{%
- \catcode`\"=\other
- \catcode`\+=\other
- \catcode`\<=\other
- \catcode`\>=\other
- \catcode`\@=\other
- \catcode`\^=\other
- \catcode`\_=\other
- \catcode`\|=\other
- \catcode`\~=\other
- \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
-}
-
-\def\scanargctxt{%
- \scanctxt
- \catcode`\\=\other
- \catcode`\^^M=\other
-}
-
-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
- \scanctxt
- \catcode`\{=\other
- \catcode`\}=\other
- \catcode`\^^M=\other
- \usembodybackslash
-}
-
-\def\macroargctxt{%
- \scanctxt
- \catcode`\\=\other
-}
-
-% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
-% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
-% where N is the macro parameter number.
-% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
-% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
-
-{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
- @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
- @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
-}
-\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
-
-\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
-\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
-
-\def\macroxxx#1{%
- \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
- \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
- \paramno=0%
- \else
- \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
- \fi
- \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
- \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
- \else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
- \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
- \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
- \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
- \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
- \fi
- \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
- \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
- \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
- \fi}
-
-\parseargdef\unmacro{%
- \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
- \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
- \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
- % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
- \begingroup
- \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
- \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
- \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
- \endgroup
- \else
- \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
- \fi
-}
-
-% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
-% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
-%
-\def\unmacrodo#1{%
- \ifx #1\relax
- % remove this
- \else
- \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
- \fi
-}
-
-% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
-% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
-% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
-\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
-\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
-\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
-
-% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
-% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
-% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
-
-% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
-% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
-% it to # just before using the token list produced.
-%
-% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
-% the macro is used.
-
-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
- \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
-\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
- \if#1;\let\next=\relax
- \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
- \advance\paramno by 1%
- \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
- {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
- \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
- \fi\next}
-
-% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
-% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
-
-\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
-
-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
-% Much magic with \expandafter here.
-% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
-% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
-\def\defmacro{%
- \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
- \ifrecursive
- \ifcase\paramno
- % 0
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \or % 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\braceorline
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
- \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \else % many
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\xdef
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
- \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
- \fi
- \else
- \ifcase\paramno
- % 0
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \or % 1
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \noexpand\braceorline
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
- \egroup
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \else % many
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\xdef
- \expandafter\expandafter
- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
- \paramlist{%
- \egroup
- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
- \fi
- \fi}
-
-\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
-
-% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
-% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
-% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
-\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
-\def\braceorlinexxx{%
- \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
- \expandafter\parsearg
- \fi \macnamexxx}
-
-
-% @alias.
-% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
-% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
-\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
-\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
- {%
- \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
- \addtomacrolist{#1}%
- \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
- }%
- \next
-}
-
-
-\message{cross references,}
-
-\newwrite\auxfile
-\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
-\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
-
-% @inforef is relatively simple.
-\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
- node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
-
-% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
-% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
-% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
-% @node foo , bar , ...
-% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
-%
-\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
-%
-% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
-% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
-\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
-\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
-
-\let\nwnode=\node
-\let\lastnode=\empty
-
-% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
-% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
-%
-\def\donoderef#1{%
- \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
- \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
- \global\let\lastnode=\empty
- \fi
-}
-
-% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
-%
-\newcount\savesfregister
-%
-\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
-\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
-\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
-
-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
-% anchor), which consists of three parts:
-% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
-% or the anchor name.
-% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
-% empty for anchors.
-% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
-%
-% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
-% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
-% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
-%
-\def\setref#1#2{%
- \pdfmkdest{#1}%
- \iflinks
- {%
- \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
- \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
- \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
- ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
- }%
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
- \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
- \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
- \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
- }%
- \fi
-}
-
-% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
-% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
-% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
-% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
-%
-\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
-\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
- \unsepspaces
- \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
- \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
- \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
- \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
- % No printed node name was explicitly given.
- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
- % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \else
- % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
- % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \else
- \ifhavexrefs
- % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
- \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
- \else
- % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
- \fi%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- %
- % Make link in pdf output.
- \ifpdf
- {\indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
- % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
- \getfilename{#4}%
- %
- % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
- \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
- %
- \leavevmode
- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
- \ifnum\filenamelength>0
- goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
- \else
- goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
- \fi
- }%
- \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
- \fi
- %
- % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
- % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
- % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
- {%
- % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
- % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
- \indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
- \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
- }%
- \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
- % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
- % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
- \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
- \refx{#1-snt}{}%
- \else
- \printedrefname
- \fi
- %
- % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
- % "in MANUALNAME".
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
- \fi
- \else
- % node/anchor (non-float) references.
- %
- % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
- % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
- % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
- % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
- % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
- % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
- \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
- \else
- % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
- % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
- % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
- % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
- % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
- {\turnoffactive
- % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
- % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
- \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
- \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
- }%
- % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
- \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
- %
- % But we always want a comma and a space:
- ,\space
- %
- % output the `page 3'.
- \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \endlink
-\endgroup}
-
-% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
-% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
-% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
-% one that Bob is working on :).
-%
-\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
-
-% Things referred to by \setref.
-%
-\def\Ynothing{}
-\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
-\def\Ynumbered{%
- \ifnum\secno=0
- \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
- \else
- \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-\def\Yappendix{%
- \ifnum\secno=0
- \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
- \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
- \else
- \putwordSection@tie
- @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
- \fi\fi\fi
-}
-
-% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
-% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
-%
-\def\refx#1#2{%
- {%
- \indexnofonts
- \otherbackslash
- \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
- \csname XR#1\endcsname
- }%
- \ifx\thisrefX\relax
- % If not defined, say something at least.
- \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
- \iflinks
- \ifhavexrefs
- \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
- \else
- \ifwarnedxrefs\else
- \global\warnedxrefstrue
- \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \else
- % It's defined, so just use it.
- \thisrefX
- \fi
- #2% Output the suffix in any case.
-}
-
-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
-% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
-% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
-%
-\def\xrdef#1#2{%
- {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
- % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
- % mess up the control sequence name.
- \indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
- }%
- %
- \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
- %
- % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
- \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
- % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
- \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
- %
- % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
- \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
- \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
- \else
- % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
- \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
- \fi
- %
- % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
- % for later use in \listoffloats.
- \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
- {\safexrefname}}%
- \fi
-}
-
-% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
-%
-\def\tryauxfile{%
- \openin 1 \jobname.aux
- \ifeof 1 \else
- \readdatafile{aux}%
- \global\havexrefstrue
- \fi
- \closein 1
-}
-
-\def\setupdatafile{%
- \catcode`\^^@=\other
- \catcode`\^^A=\other
- \catcode`\^^B=\other
- \catcode`\^^C=\other
- \catcode`\^^D=\other
- \catcode`\^^E=\other
- \catcode`\^^F=\other
- \catcode`\^^G=\other
- \catcode`\^^H=\other
- \catcode`\^^K=\other
- \catcode`\^^L=\other
- \catcode`\^^N=\other
- \catcode`\^^P=\other
- \catcode`\^^Q=\other
- \catcode`\^^R=\other
- \catcode`\^^S=\other
- \catcode`\^^T=\other
- \catcode`\^^U=\other
- \catcode`\^^V=\other
- \catcode`\^^W=\other
- \catcode`\^^X=\other
- \catcode`\^^Z=\other
- \catcode`\^^[=\other
- \catcode`\^^\=\other
- \catcode`\^^]=\other
- \catcode`\^^^=\other
- \catcode`\^^_=\other
- % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
- % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
- % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
- % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
- % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
- % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
- % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
- % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
- %
- % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
- % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
- % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
- %
- \catcode`\^=\other
- %
- % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
- \catcode`\~=\other
- \catcode`\[=\other
- \catcode`\]=\other
- \catcode`\"=\other
- \catcode`\_=\other
- \catcode`\|=\other
- \catcode`\<=\other
- \catcode`\>=\other
- \catcode`\$=\other
- \catcode`\#=\other
- \catcode`\&=\other
- \catcode`\%=\other
- \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
- %
- % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
- % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
- % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
- % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
- % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
- % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
- % now. --karl, 15jan04.
- \catcode`\\=\other
- %
- % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
- {%
- \count1=128
- \def\loop{%
- \catcode\count1=\other
- \advance\count1 by 1
- \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
- }%
- }%
- %
- % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
- \catcode`\{=1
- \catcode`\}=2
- \catcode`\@=0
-}
-
-\def\readdatafile#1{%
-\begingroup
- \setupdatafile
- \input\jobname.#1
-\endgroup}
-
-
-\message{insertions,}
-% including footnotes.
-
-\newcount \footnoteno
-
-% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
-% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
-% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
-% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
-% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
-\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
-
-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
-\let\footnotestyle=\comment
-
-{\catcode `\@=11
-%
-% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
-\gdef\footnote{%
- \let\indent=\ptexindent
- \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
- \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
- \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
- %
- % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
- % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
- \let\@sf\empty
- \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
- %
- % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
- \unskip
- \thisfootno\@sf
- \dofootnote
-}%
-
-% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
-% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
-%
-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
-% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
-% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
-%
-\gdef\dofootnote{%
- \insert\footins\bgroup
- % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
- % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
- % So reset some parameters.
- \hsize=\pagewidth
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
- \floatingpenalty\@MM
- \leftskip\z@skip
- \rightskip\z@skip
- \spaceskip\z@skip
- \xspaceskip\z@skip
- \parindent\defaultparindent
- %
- \smallfonts \rm
- %
- % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
- % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
- % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
- % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
- \let\noindent = \relax
- %
- % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
- % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
- \everypar = {\hang}%
- \textindent{\thisfootno}%
- %
- % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
- % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
- % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
- \footstrut
- \futurelet\next\fo@t
-}
-}%end \catcode `\@=11
-
-% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
-% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
-% would be lost.
-% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
-% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
-% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
-
-% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
-% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
-% out prematurely.
-%
-\def\startsavinginserts{%
- \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
- \let\insert\saveinsert
- \else
- \let\checkinserts\relax
- \fi
-}
-
-% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
-% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
-%
-\def\saveinsert#1{%
- \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
- \afterassignment\next
- % swallow the left brace
- \let\temp =
-}
-\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
-\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
-
-\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
-
-\def\placesaveins#1{%
- \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
- {\box#1}%
-}
-
-% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
-{
- \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
- \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
-}
-
-% initialization:
-\def\newsaveins #1{%
- \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
- \next
-}
-\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
- \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
- \checksaveins #1}%
-}
-
-% initialize:
-\let\checkinserts\empty
-\newsaveins\footins
-\newsaveins\margin
-
-
-% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
-% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
-%
-% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
-% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
-% undone and the next image would fail.
-\openin 1 = epsf.tex
-\ifeof 1 \else
- % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
- % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
- \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
- \input epsf.tex
-\fi
-\closein 1
-%
-% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
-\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
-\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
- work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
- it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
-%
-\def\image#1{%
- \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
- \ifwarnednoepsf \else
- \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
- \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
- \global\warnednoepsftrue
- \fi
- \else
- \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
- \fi
-}
-%
-% Arguments to @image:
-% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
-% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
-% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
-% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
-% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
-\newif\ifimagevmode
-\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
- \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
- \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
- % If the image is by itself, center it.
- \ifvmode
- \imagevmodetrue
- \nobreak\medskip
- % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
- % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
- % above and below.
- \nobreak\vskip\parskip
- \nobreak
- \fi
- %
- % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
- % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
- % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
- \noindent
- %
- % Output the image.
- \ifpdf
- \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \else
- % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
- \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
- \fi
- %
- \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
-\endgroup}
-
-
-% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
-% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
-% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
-%
-\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
-
-% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
-\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
-
-% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
-% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
-% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
-%
-% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
-% be referable.
-%
-% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
-% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
-%
-% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
-% chapter-level command.
-\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
-%
-\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
- \let\thiscaption=\empty
- \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
- %
- % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
- %
- % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
- % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
- %
- \startsavinginserts
- %
- % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
- \par
- %
- \vtop\bgroup
- \def\floattype{#1}%
- \def\floatlabel{#2}%
- \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
- %
- \ifx\floattype\empty
- \let\safefloattype=\empty
- \else
- {%
- % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
- % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
- \indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
- }%
- \fi
- %
- % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
- % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
- % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
- %
- \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
- \global\advance\floatno by 1
- %
- {%
- % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
- % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
- % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
- % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
- % lists of floats.
- %
- \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
- \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
- }%
- \fi
- %
- % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
- \vskip\parskip
- %
- % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
- \restorefirstparagraphindent
-}
-
-% we have these possibilities:
-% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
-% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
-% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
-% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
-% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
-% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
-% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
-% @float & no caption:
-%
-\def\Efloat{%
- \let\floatident = \empty
- %
- % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
- \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
- %
- % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
- \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
- \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
- \fi
- % the number.
- \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
- \fi
- %
- % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
- % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
- \let\captionline = \floatident
- %
- \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
- \ifx\floatident\empty \else
- \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
- \fi
- %
- % caption text.
- \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
- \fi
- %
- % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
- % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
- \ifx\captionline\empty \else
- \vskip.5\parskip
- \captionline
- %
- % Space below caption.
- \vskip\parskip
- \fi
- %
- % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
- % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
- % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
- % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
- % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
- {%
- \atdummies
- %
- % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
- % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
- % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
- \scanexp{%
- \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
- \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
- \thiscaption
- \else
- \thisshortcaption
- \fi
- }%
- }%
- \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
- \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
- }%
- \fi
- \egroup % end of \vtop
- %
- % place the captured inserts
- %
- % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
- % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
- % float. --kasal, 26may04
- %
- \checkinserts
-}
-
-% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
-%
-\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
- \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
-}
-
-% @caption, @shortcaption
-%
-\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
-\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
-\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
-\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
-
-% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
-% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
-\def\getfloatno#1{%
- \ifx#1\relax
- % Haven't seen this figure type before.
- \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
- %
- % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
- \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
- \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
- \fi
- \let\floatno#1%
-}
-
-% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
-% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
-% first read the @float command.
-%
-\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
-
-% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
-% distinguish floats from other xref types.
-\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
-
-% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
-% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
-% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
-%
-\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
-%
-% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
-% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
-%
-\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
- \def\temp{#1}%
- \def\iffloattype{#2}%
- \ifx\temp\floatmagic
-}
-
-% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
-%
-\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
- \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
- {%
- % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
- % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
- \indexnofonts
- \turnoffactive
- \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
- }%
- %
- % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
- \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
- \ifhavexrefs
- % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
- \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
- \fi
- \else
- \begingroup
- \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
- \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
- \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
- \endgroup
- \fi
-}
-
-% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
-% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
-% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
-% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
-%
-% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
-% they won't appear in the aux file).
-%
-\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
-\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
- % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
- % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
- % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
- % in pdf output.
- \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
- %
- % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
- \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
- \writeentry
-}}
-
-
-\message{localization,}
-
-% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
-% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
-% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
-%
-{
- \catcode`\_ = \active
- \globaldefs=1
-\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
- \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
- \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
- % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
- \ifeof 1
- \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
- \else
- \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
- \input txi-#1.tex
- \fi
- \closein 1
- \endgroup % end raw TeX
-\endgroup}
-}
-%
-% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
-% try txi-de.tex.
-%
-\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
- \ifeof 1
- \errhelp = \nolanghelp
- \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
- \else
- \input txi-#1.tex
- \fi
- \closein 1
-}
-%
-\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
-is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
-directory should work if nowhere else does.}
-
-% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
-% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
-% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
-%
-% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
-% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
-% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
-%
-% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
-% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
-% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
-% accented characters problem.)
-%
-\catcode`@=11
-\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
- % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
- \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
- \message{no patterns for #1}%
- \else
- \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
- \fi
- % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
- \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
- \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
-}
-
-% Helpers for encodings.
-% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
-%
-\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
- \count255=128
- \loop\ifnum\count255<256
- \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
- \advance\count255 by 1
- \repeat
-}
-
-\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
- \count255=128
- \loop\ifnum\count255<256
- \catcode\count255=#1\relax
- \advance\count255 by 1
- \repeat
-}
-
-% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
-% according to the specified encoding.
-%
-\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
- % Encoding being declared for the document.
- \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
- %
- % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
- % to compare them with \ifx.
- \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
- \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
- \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
- \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
- \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
- %
- \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
- \asciichardefs
- %
- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
- \lattwochardefs
- %
- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
- \latonechardefs
- %
- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
- \latninechardefs
- %
- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
- \utfeightchardefs
- %
- \else
- \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
- %
- \fi % utfeight
- \fi % latnine
- \fi % latone
- \fi % lattwo
- \fi % ascii
-}
-
-% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
-% the default font encoding (OT1).
-%
-\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
-
-% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
-\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
-
-% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
-% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
-% macros containing the character definitions.
-\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
-%
-% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
-\def\latonechardefs{%
- \gdef^^a0{~}
- \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
- \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
- \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
- \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
- \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
- \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
- \gdef^^a7{\S}
- \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
- \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
- \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
- \gdef^^ab{\guillemetleft}
- \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
- \gdef^^ad{\-}
- \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
- \gdef^^af{\={}}
- %
- \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
- \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
- \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
- \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
- \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
- \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
- \gdef^^b6{\P}
- %
- \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
- \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
- \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
- \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
- %
- \gdef^^bb{\guilletright}
- \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
- \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
- \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
- \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
- %
- \gdef^^c0{\`A}
- \gdef^^c1{\'A}
- \gdef^^c2{\^A}
- \gdef^^c3{\~A}
- \gdef^^c4{\"A}
- \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
- \gdef^^c6{\AE}
- \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
- \gdef^^c8{\`E}
- \gdef^^c9{\'E}
- \gdef^^ca{\^E}
- \gdef^^cb{\"E}
- \gdef^^cc{\`I}
- \gdef^^cd{\'I}
- \gdef^^ce{\^I}
- \gdef^^cf{\"I}
- %
- \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}}
- \gdef^^d1{\~N}
- \gdef^^d2{\`O}
- \gdef^^d3{\'O}
- \gdef^^d4{\^O}
- \gdef^^d5{\~O}
- \gdef^^d6{\"O}
- \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
- \gdef^^d8{\O}
- \gdef^^d9{\`U}
- \gdef^^da{\'U}
- \gdef^^db{\^U}
- \gdef^^dc{\"U}
- \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
- \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}}
- \gdef^^df{\ss}
- %
- \gdef^^e0{\`a}
- \gdef^^e1{\'a}
- \gdef^^e2{\^a}
- \gdef^^e3{\~a}
- \gdef^^e4{\"a}
- \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
- \gdef^^e6{\ae}
- \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
- \gdef^^e8{\`e}
- \gdef^^e9{\'e}
- \gdef^^ea{\^e}
- \gdef^^eb{\"e}
- \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
- \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
- \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
- \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
- %
- \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}}
- \gdef^^f1{\~n}
- \gdef^^f2{\`o}
- \gdef^^f3{\'o}
- \gdef^^f4{\^o}
- \gdef^^f5{\~o}
- \gdef^^f6{\"o}
- \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
- \gdef^^f8{\o}
- \gdef^^f9{\`u}
- \gdef^^fa{\'u}
- \gdef^^fb{\^u}
- \gdef^^fc{\"u}
- \gdef^^fd{\'y}
- \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}}
- \gdef^^ff{\"y}
-}
-
-% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
-\def\latninechardefs{%
- % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
- \latonechardefs
- %
- \gdef^^a4{\euro}
- \gdef^^a6{\v S}
- \gdef^^a8{\v s}
- \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
- \gdef^^b8{\v z}
- \gdef^^bc{\OE}
- \gdef^^bd{\oe}
- \gdef^^be{\"Y}
-}
-
-% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
-\def\lattwochardefs{%
- \gdef^^a0{~}
- \gdef^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
- \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
- \gdef^^a3{\L}
- \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
- \gdef^^a5{\v L}
- \gdef^^a6{\'S}
- \gdef^^a7{\S}
- \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
- \gdef^^a9{\v S}
- \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
- \gdef^^ab{\v T}
- \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
- \gdef^^ad{\-}
- \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
- \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
- %
- \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
- \gdef^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
- \gdef^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
- \gdef^^b3{\l}
- \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
- \gdef^^b5{\v l}
- \gdef^^b6{\'s}
- \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
- \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
- \gdef^^b9{\v s}
- \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
- \gdef^^bb{\v t}
- \gdef^^bc{\'z}
- \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
- \gdef^^be{\v z}
- \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
- %
- \gdef^^c0{\'R}
- \gdef^^c1{\'A}
- \gdef^^c2{\^A}
- \gdef^^c3{\u A}
- \gdef^^c4{\"A}
- \gdef^^c5{\'L}
- \gdef^^c6{\'C}
- \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
- \gdef^^c8{\v C}
- \gdef^^c9{\'E}
- \gdef^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
- \gdef^^cb{\"E}
- \gdef^^cc{\v E}
- \gdef^^cd{\'I}
- \gdef^^ce{\^I}
- \gdef^^cf{\v D}
- %
- \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
- \gdef^^d1{\'N}
- \gdef^^d2{\v N}
- \gdef^^d3{\'O}
- \gdef^^d4{\^O}
- \gdef^^d5{\H O}
- \gdef^^d6{\"O}
- \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
- \gdef^^d8{\v R}
- \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
- \gdef^^da{\'U}
- \gdef^^db{\H U}
- \gdef^^dc{\"U}
- \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
- \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
- \gdef^^df{\ss}
- %
- \gdef^^e0{\'r}
- \gdef^^e1{\'a}
- \gdef^^e2{\^a}
- \gdef^^e3{\u a}
- \gdef^^e4{\"a}
- \gdef^^e5{\'l}
- \gdef^^e6{\'c}
- \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
- \gdef^^e8{\v c}
- \gdef^^e9{\'e}
- \gdef^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
- \gdef^^eb{\"e}
- \gdef^^ec{\v e}
- \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
- \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
- \gdef^^ef{\v d}
- %
- \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
- \gdef^^f1{\'n}
- \gdef^^f2{\v n}
- \gdef^^f3{\'o}
- \gdef^^f4{\^o}
- \gdef^^f5{\H o}
- \gdef^^f6{\"o}
- \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
- \gdef^^f8{\v r}
- \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
- \gdef^^fa{\'u}
- \gdef^^fb{\H u}
- \gdef^^fc{\"u}
- \gdef^^fd{\'y}
- \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
- \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
-}
-
-% UTF-8 character definitions.
-%
-% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
-% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
-% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
-%
-\newcount\countUTFx
-\newcount\countUTFy
-\newcount\countUTFz
-
-\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
-%
-\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
-%
-\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
-
-\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
- \ifx #1\relax
- \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
- \else
- \expandafter #1%
- \fi
-}
-
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\~13
- \catcode`\"12
-
- \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
- \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
- \uccode`\~\countUTFx
- \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
- \advance\countUTFx by 1
- \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
- \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
- \fi}
-
- \countUTFx = "C2
- \countUTFy = "E0
- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
- \UTFviiiLoop
-
- \countUTFx = "E0
- \countUTFy = "F0
- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
- \UTFviiiLoop
-
- \countUTFx = "F0
- \countUTFy = "F4
- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
- \UTFviiiLoop
-\endgroup
-
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\"=12
- \catcode`\<=12
- \catcode`\.=12
- \catcode`\,=12
- \catcode`\;=12
- \catcode`\!=12
- \catcode`\~=13
-
- \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
- \countUTFz = "#1\relax
- \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
- \begingroup
- \parseXMLCharref
- \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
- \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
- \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
- \endgroup}
-
- \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
- \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
- \errhelp = \EMsimple
- \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
- \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
- \parseUTFviiiA,%
- \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
- \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
- \parseUTFviiiA;%
- \parseUTFviiiA,%
- \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
- \else
- \parseUTFviiiA;%
- \parseUTFviiiA,%
- \parseUTFviiiA!%
- \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
- \fi\fi\fi
- }
-
- \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
- \countUTFx = \countUTFz
- \divide\countUTFz by 64
- \countUTFy = \countUTFz
- \multiply\countUTFz by 64
- \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
- \advance\countUTFx by 128
- \uccode `#1\countUTFx
- \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
-
- \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
- \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
- \uccode `#3\countUTFz
- \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
-\endgroup
-
-\def\utfeightchardefs{%
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
-
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
-}% end of \utfeightchardefs
-
-
-% US-ASCII character definitions.
-\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
- \relax
-}
-
-% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
-% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
-% document encoding.
-%
-\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
-
-
-\message{formatting,}
-
-\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
-
-\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
-\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
-\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
-
-% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
-\vbadness = 10000
-
-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
-\hbadness = 2000
-
-% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
-\widowpenalty=10000
-\clubpenalty=10000
-
-% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
-% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
-% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
-% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
-%
-\def\setemergencystretch{%
- \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
- % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
- \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
- \else
- \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
- \fi
-}
-
-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
-% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
-% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
-%
-% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
-% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
-%
-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
- \voffset = #3\relax
- \topskip = #6\relax
- \splittopskip = \topskip
- %
- \vsize = #1\relax
- \advance\vsize by \topskip
- \outervsize = \vsize
- \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
- \pageheight = \vsize
- %
- \hsize = #2\relax
- \outerhsize = \hsize
- \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
- \pagewidth = \hsize
- %
- \normaloffset = #4\relax
- \bindingoffset = #5\relax
- %
- \ifpdf
- \pdfpageheight #7\relax
- \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
- % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
- % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
- \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
- \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
- \fi
- %
- \setleading{\textleading}
- %
- \parindent = \defaultparindent
- \setemergencystretch
-}
-
-% @letterpaper (the default).
-\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \textleading = 13.2pt
- %
- % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
- \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
- {\voffset}{.25in}%
- {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
- {11in}{8.5in}%
-}}
-
-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
-\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
- \textleading = 12pt
- %
- \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
- {-.2in}{0in}%
- {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
- {9.25in}{7in}%
- %
- \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
- \tolerance = 700
- \hfuzz = 1pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = .5cm
-}}
-
-% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
-% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
-\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
- \textleading = 12pt
- %
- \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
- {-.2in}{-.4in}%
- {0pt}{14pt}%
- {9in}{6in}%
- %
- \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
- \tolerance = 700
- \hfuzz = 1pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = .4cm
-}}
-
-% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
-\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \textleading = 13.2pt
- %
- % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
- % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
- % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
- % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
- % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
- % your texinfo source file like this:
- % @tex
- % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
- % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
- % @end tex
- \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- %
- \tolerance = 700
- \hfuzz = 1pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = 5mm
-}}
-
-% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
-% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
-% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
-\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
- \textleading = 12.5pt
- %
- \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
- {210mm}{148mm}%
- %
- \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
- \tolerance = 800
- \hfuzz = 1.2pt
- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
- \defbodyindent = 2mm
- \tableindent = 12mm
-}}
-
-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
-\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
- \afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
- {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- %
- % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
- \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
-\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
- \afourpaper
- \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
- {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
- {297mm}{210mm}%
- \globaldefs = 0
-}}
-
-% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
-% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
-% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
-%
-\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
-\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
- \globaldefs = 1
- %
- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
- \setleading{\textleading}%
- %
- \dimen0 = #1\relax
- \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
- %
- \dimen2 = \hsize
- \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
- %
- \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
- {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
- {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
-}}
-
-% Set default to letter.
-%
-\letterpaper
-
-
-\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
-
-% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
-\catcode`\"=\other
-\catcode`\~=\other
-\catcode`\^=\other
-\catcode`\_=\other
-\catcode`\|=\other
-\catcode`\<=\other
-\catcode`\>=\other
-\catcode`\+=\other
-\catcode`\$=\other
-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
-\def\normaltilde{~}
-\def\normalcaret{^}
-\def\normalunderscore{_}
-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
-\def\normalless{<}
-\def\normalgreater{>}
-\def\normalplus{+}
-\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
-% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
-% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
-%
-% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
-% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
-% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
-% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
-%
-\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
-% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
-% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
-% this is not a problem.
-\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
-
-% Turn off all special characters except @
-% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
-% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
-% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
-
-\catcode`\"=\active
-\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
-\let"=\activedoublequote
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\def~{{\tt\char126}}
-\chardef\hat=`\^
-\catcode`\^=\active
-\def^{{\tt \hat}}
-
-\catcode`\_=\active
-\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
-\let\realunder=_
-% Subroutine for the previous macro.
-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
-
-\catcode`\|=\active
-\def|{{\tt\char124}}
-\chardef \less=`\<
-\catcode`\<=\active
-\def<{{\tt \less}}
-\chardef \gtr=`\>
-\catcode`\>=\active
-\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
-\catcode`\+=\active
-\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
-\catcode`\$=\active
-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
-% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
-% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
-% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
-\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
-
-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
-% parsing them.
-\def\turnoffactive{%
- \normalturnoffactive
- \otherbackslash
-}
-
-\catcode`\@=0
-
-% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
-% as in \char`\\.
-\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
-\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
-
-% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
-% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
-{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
-
-% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
-% in fixed width font.
-\catcode`\\=\active
-@def@normalbackslash{{@tt@backslashcurfont}}
-% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
-% @let \ = @normalbackslash
-
-% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
-% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
-% catcode other.
-@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
-@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
-
-% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
-% the literal character `\'.
-%
-@def@normalturnoffactive{%
- @let\=@normalbackslash
- @let"=@normaldoublequote
- @let~=@normaltilde
- @let^=@normalcaret
- @let_=@normalunderscore
- @let|=@normalverticalbar
- @let<=@normalless
- @let>=@normalgreater
- @let+=@normalplus
- @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
- @markupsetuplqdefault
- @markupsetuprqdefault
- @unsepspaces
-}
-
-% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
-% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
-@otherifyactive
-
-% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
-% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
-% a backslash.
-%
-@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
-@global@let\ = @eatinput
-
-% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
-% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
-% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
-% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
-% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
-%
-@gdef@fixbackslash{%
- @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
- @catcode`+=@active
- @catcode`@_=@active
-}
-
-% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
-@escapechar = `@@
-
-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
-@catcode`@& = @other
-@catcode`@# = @other
-@catcode`@% = @other
-
-@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
-@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}. If we
-@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
-@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
-@catcode`@'=@active
-@catcode`@`=@active
-@markupsetuplqdefault
-@markupsetuprqdefault
-
-@c Local variables:
-@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
-@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
-@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
-@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
-@c time-stamp-end: "}"
-@c End:
-
-@c vim:sw=2:
-
-@ignore
- arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
-@end ignore
projects / pspp-builds.git / commitdiff